英语语法口诀（精选多篇）

推荐第1篇：初中英语语法口诀

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

初中英语语法口诀

一.词汇

⑴ 单词

1.介词：in, on, under, behind, near, at, of

1).in表示"在……中"， "在……内"。例如：

in our cla 在我们班上

in my bag 在我的书包里

in the desk 在桌子里

in the claroom 在教室里

2).on 表示"在……上"。例如：

on the wall 在墙上

on the desk 在桌子上

on the blackboard 在黑板上

3).under表示"在……下"。例如：

under the tree 在树下

under the chair 在椅子下

under the bed 在床下

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

4).behind表示"在……后面"。例如：

behind the door 在门后

behind the tree 在树后

5).near表示"在……附近"。例如：

near the teacher's desk 在讲桌附近

near the bed 在床附近

6).at表示"在……处"。例如：

at school 在学校

at home 在家

at the door 在门口

7).of 表示"……的"。例如：

a picture of our claroom 我们教室的一幅画

a map of China 一张中国地图

2.冠词 a / an / the:

冠词一般位于所限定的名词前，用来署名名词所指的人或事物。冠词有不定冠词和定冠词两种。不定冠词有两个形式，即a和an。a用在

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

以辅音音素开头的词前，如a book; an用在以元音音素开头的字母前，如an apple.

a或an与可数名词单数连用，泛指某类人或某物中的一个。

This is a cat. 这是一只猫。

It's an English book. 这是一本英语书。

His father is a worker. 他的爸爸是个工人。

the既可以用在可数名词前，也可以用在不可数名词前，表示某个或某些特定的人或事物，也可以指上文提到过的人或事物。

Who's the boy in the hat? 戴帽子的男孩是谁呀？

------ What can you see in the claroom? ------ I can see a bag. ------ Where's the bag? ------ It's on the desk.

------- 你能在教室里看到什么呀？

------ 我能看见一个书包。

------ 书包在哪呀？

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

------ 在桌子上。

3.some和any

①在肯定句中用some.例如：

There are some books on the desk.桌子上有一些书。

Lucy has some good books露西有一些好书。

②在疑问句和否定句中用any。例如：

Is there any ink in your pen?你的钢笔里有墨水吗？

Do you have any brothers and sisters?你有兄弟姐妹吗？

There isn't any water in the gla.杯子里没有水。

⑵记住它们的特殊用法。

①some亦可用于表示盼望得到对方肯定的答复或表示建议、委婉请求的疑问句中，这一点我们不久就会学到。例如：

Would you like to have some apples?你想吃苹果吗？

②any也可用于肯定句中，表示"任何的"。例如：

Any one of us can do this.我们当中任何一个都能做这个。

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

some 和any的用法是经常出现的考点，希望大家能准确地掌握它们的用法。

4.family

family看作为一个整体时，意思是"家庭"，后面的谓语动词be用单数形式 is ；如把family看作为家庭成员时，应理解为复数，后面的谓语动词be应用are。

My family is a big family.我的家庭是个大家庭。

My family are all at home now.我的家人现在都在家。

Family强调由家人组成的一个集体或强调这个集体中的成员。home指个人出生、被抚养长大的环境和居住地点。 house指"家"、"房屋"，侧重居住的建筑本身。

His family are all workers.他的家人都是工人。

My home is in Beijing.我的家在北京。

He isn't at home now.他现在不在家。

It's a picture of my family.这是一张我全家的照片。

5.little的用法

a little dog 一只小狗，a little boy 一个小男孩。little常用来修饰有生命的名词。

*但little还可表示否定意义，意为"少的"，加不可数名词。

There is little time.几乎没时间了。

There is little water in the cup.杯中水很少。

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

⑵ 词组

on the desk 在桌子上

behind the chair 在椅子后

under the chair 在椅子下面

in her pencil-box 在她的铅笔盒中

near the door 在门附近

a picture of a claroom 一个教室的图片

look at the picture 看这张图片

the teacher's desk 讲桌

a map of China 一张中国地图

family tree 家谱

have a seat 坐下，就坐

this way 这边走

二.日常用语

1.Come and meet my family. 2.Go and see.I think it's Li Lei. 3.Glad to meet you.

4.What can you see in the picture? I can see a clock / some books. 5.Can you see an orange? Yes, I can./ No, I can't. 6.Where's Shenzhen? It's near Hong Kong.

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

7.Let me see.（口语）让我想想看。 see 在这是"明白、懂了"，不可译作"看见"。For example : 8.Please have a seat.seat表示"座位"，是个名词。have a seat表示"就坐"，也可以说take a seat, 和sit down的意思相同。

三.语法

1.名词所有格

名词如要表示与后面名词的所有关系，通常用名词所有格的形式，意为"……的"。一般有以下几种形式：

（1）.一般情况下在词尾加"'s"。例如：

Kate's father Kate的爸爸

my mother's friend 我妈妈的朋友

（2）.如果复数名词以s结尾，只加"'"。例如：

Teachers' Day 教师节

The boys' game 男孩们的游戏

（3）.如果复数名词不以s结尾，仍加"'s"。例如：

Children's Day 儿童节

Women's Day 妇女节

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

（4）.表示两个或几个共有时，所有格应加在后一个名词上。例如：

Lucy and Lily's room Lucy 和Lily的房间

Kate and Jim's father Kate 和Jim的爸爸

动物和无生命事物的名词的所有格一般不在词尾加"'s"，而常常用介词of的短语来表示。

a map of China 一幅中国地图

the name of her cat 她的猫的名字

a picture of my family 我的家庭的一张照片

the door of the bedroom 卧室的门

2.祈使句

祈使句主要用来表示说话人的请求、命令、建议、叮嘱等意图。祈使句一般不用主语，读时用降调。为使语气委婉、礼貌，常在句首或句尾加please 。在句尾时，please前多用逗号。

（1）.祈使句肯定形式的谓语动词一律用动词原形。

Go and see.去看看。

Come in, please.请进。

（2）.祈使句的否定形式常用don't于句首。

Don't look at your books.不要看书。

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

Don't play on the road.不要在马路上玩。

3.There be 的句子结构

There be是一个"存在"句型，表示"有"的意思，

肯定句的形式为：There be + 名词（单数或复数）+地点状语或时间状语。

be动词单复数的确定，看be后边第一个名词，当所接主语为单数或不可数名词时，be动词形式为is；当所接主语为复数名词时，be动词为are；当be动词后接两个以上主语时，be动词与最临近主语保持数上的一致。意思为"某地有某人或某物"。如：

There is an eraser and two pens on the desk.桌子上有一块橡皮和两支钢笔。

There are two pens and an eraser on the desk.桌上有两支钢笔和一块橡皮。

（1）there be的否定句，即在be的后面加上not。

否定形式为：There be + not + (any) + 名词+地点状语。

There is not any cat in the room.房间里没猫。

There aren't any books on the desk.桌子上没书。

（2）there be句型的疑问句就是将be提到句首：Be there + (any) +名

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

词+地点状语？肯定回答：Yes, there is / are.否定回答：No, there isn't / aren't.

---Is there a dog in the picture? 画上有一只狗吗？

---Yes, there is.有。

---Are there any boats in the river? 河里有船吗？

---No, there aren't.没有。

（3）特殊疑问句：How many ...are there (+地点状语)？"某地有多少人或物？"回答用There be ...

There's one./ There are two / three / some ... 有时直接就用数字来回答。One./ Two ...

---How many students are there in the claroom? 教室里有多少学生？

---There's only one./ There are nine.只有一个。/有九个。

（4）如果名词是不可数名词，用：How much + 不可数名词 + is there + 地点状语？

How much water is there in the cup? 杯中有多少水？

How much food is there in the bowl? 碗里有多少食物？

中学英语语法网络图

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

一．名词

I.名词的种类：

专有名词

普通名词

国名.地名.人名，

团体.机构名称

可数名词

不可数名词

个体名词

集体名词

抽象名词

物质名词

精心收集

精心编辑 精致阅读 如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

II.名词的数：

1.规则名词的复数形式：

名词的复数形式，一般在单数形式后面加-s或-es。现将构成方法与读音规则列表如下：

规则

例词

1 一般情况在词尾加-s map-maps, sea-seas, girl-girls, day-days

2 以s, x, ch, sh结尾的名词后加-es cla-claes, box-boxes, watch-watches, dish-dishes

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

以-f或-fe结尾的词

变-f和-fe为v再加-es leaf-leaves, thief-thieves, knife-knives, loaf-loaves, wife-wives

加-s belief-beliefs, chief-chiefs, proof-proofs, roof-roofs, gulf-gulfs

4 以辅音字母加y结尾的名词，变y为i加-es party-parties, family-families, story-stories, city-cities

5 以元音字母加y结尾的名词，或专有名词以y结尾的，加-s toy-toys, boy-boys, day-days, ray-rays, Henry-Henrys

6 以辅音字母加-o结尾的名词

一般加-es hero-heroes, Negro-Negroes, potato-potatoes, tomato-tomatoes

不少外来词加-s piano-pianos, photo-photos, auto-autos, kilo-kilos, solo-solos

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

两者皆可

zero-zeros/zeroes, volcano-volcanoes/ volcanos

7 以元音字母加-o结尾的名词加-s radio-radios, bamboo-bamboos, zoo-zoos

8 以-th结尾的名词加-s truth-truths, mouth-mouths, month-months, path-paths,

、冠词基本用法

【速记口诀】

名词是秃子，常要戴帽子，

可数名词单，须用a或an，

辅音前用a， an在元音前，

若为特指时，则须用定冠，

复数不可数，泛指the不见，

碰到代词时，冠词均不现。

【妙语诠释】 冠词是中考必考的语法知识之一，也是中考考查的主要对象。以上口诀包括的意思有：①名词在一般情况下不单用，

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

常常要和冠词连用；②表示不确指的可数名词单数前要用不定冠词a或an，确指时要用定冠词the；③如复数名词表示泛指，名词前有this，these，my，some等时就不用冠词。

二、名词单数变复数规则

【速记口诀】

单数变复数，规则要记住，

一般加s，特殊有几处：

/s/结尾，es不离后，

末尾字母o，大多加s，

两人有两菜，es不离口，

词尾f、fe，s前有v和e；

没有规则词，必须单独记。

【妙语诠释】 ①大部分单数可数名词变为复数要加s，但如果单词以/t?蘩/、/?蘩/、/s/发音结尾（也就是单词如果以ch，sh，s，x等结尾），则一般加es；②以o结尾的单词除了两人（negro，hero）两菜（tomato，potato）加es外，其余一般加s；③以f或fe结尾的单词一般是把f，fe变为ve再加s；④英语中还有些单词没有规则，需要特殊记忆，如child—children，mouse—mice，deer—deer，sheep—sheep，Chinese—Chinese，ox—oxen，man—men，woman—women，foot—feet，tooth—teeth。

三、名词所有格用法

【速记口诀】

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

名词所有格，表物是“谁的”，

若为生命词，加“’s”即可行，

词尾有s，仅把逗号择；

并列名词后，各自和共有，

前者分别加，后者最后加；

若为无命词，of所有格，

前后须倒置，此是硬规则。

【妙语诠释】 ①有生命的名词所有格一般加s，但如果名词以s结尾，则只加“’”；②并列名词所有格表示各自所有时，分别加“’s”，如果是共有，则只在最后名词加“’s”；③如果是无生命的名词则用of表示所有格，这里需要注意它们的顺序与汉语不同，A of B要翻译为B的A。

四、接不定式作宾语的动词

【速记口诀】

三个希望两答应，两个要求莫拒绝；

设法学会做决定，不要假装在选择。

【妙语诠释】 三个希望两答应：hope，wish，want，agree，promise

两个要求莫拒绝：demand，ask，refuse

设法学会做决定：manage，learn，decide

不要假装在选择：petend，choose

五、接动名词作宾语的动词

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

【速记口诀】

Mrs.P Black mied a beef bag.（Ｐ·布莱克夫人丢了一个牛肉袋。）

【妙语诠释】 该句话中每个字母代表了一个动词或短语，这些动词要求后面跟动名词作宾语。这些动词分别是：

M=mind， r=risk， s=succeed in，P=practice，B=be busy， l=look forward to，a=admit，c=can’t help， k=keep on， m=mi，i=insist on，s=suggest，s=stop，e=enjoy，d=delay，

a=avoid，b=be worth，a=advise，g=give up。

六、不定式作宾语补足语时省to的动词

【速记口诀】

一感，二听，三让，四看，半帮助

【妙语诠释】 一感：feel；二听：hear，listen to；三让：make，let，have；四看：see，notice，watch，ob-serve；半帮助：help。

七、形容词和副词比较等级用法

【速记口诀】

1.比较级与最高级：两者比较than相连，三者比较the在前。

2．同级比较：同级比较用原形，as…as永不离；as…as加not，只言两者是同一，若是not so…as，后强前弱不看齐。

【妙语诠释】 ①比较级通常和than连用，而最高级通常跟有定冠词the；②同级比较一般用as…as表示“与…一样”，这时谁强谁弱不能比较出来，而not so…as则表示后者比前者强，翻译为“不

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

演讲稿 工作总结 调研报告 讲话稿 事迹材料 心得体会 策划方案

如……”。

八、反意疑问句用法

【速记口诀】

反意问句三要点，前后谓语正相反；

短句not如出现，必须缩写是习惯；

最后一点应注意，短句主语代词填。

【妙语诠释】 ①反意疑问句的构成应该是“肯定的陈述句+否定的疑问”或“否定的陈述句+肯定的疑问”；②在短句中not必须与do，will，can等组成缩写形式；③在简短问句中，疑问句的主语必须是代词，而不能用名词形式。

九、感叹句用法

【速记口诀】

感叹句，并不难，what、how放句前；

强调名词用what，其余用how很简单。

【妙语诠释】 由what引导的感叹句一般修饰名词，而how引导的感叹句一般修饰形容词、副词或句子。

精心收集

精心编辑

精致阅读

如需请下载！

推荐第2篇：七年级英语语法学习口诀

初一英语语法学习口诀

一． 知识口诀化，朗朗上口，得心应手。

“顺口溜”的特有韵律会使抽象、烦琐的词语和语法知识、规则化难为易，便于记忆，增强了学生的学习热情和学习信心，学生的学习成绩会直线上升，有的记忆深刻，甚至会终生难忘。

如：

1.最初的简单动词的学习。

来是come，去是go。点头yes，摇头no。再见要用goodbye，谢谢要说thank you。

2.关于Be的用法：BTH

我用am，你用 are，is用在他、她、它，凡是复数都用are。不能错来，不能差。

3.关于冠词的使用：BTH

不见原因（元音），别施恩（n）。

4.不用冠词的部分情况：BTH

季节、月份、节假日，三餐、球类和星期。

5.以-fe结尾变复数只加s的单词：

gulf roof chief serf blief proof handkerchief

海湾边，屋顶上，首领奴仆两相望，谁说他们无信仰，证据写在手帕上。

6.复习以-f (e)结尾的名词变复数：

leaf half self wife knife shelf wolf thief

树叶半数自己黄，妻子拿刀去割粮，

架后窜出一只狼，就像强盗逃命忙。

7.关于以o 结尾的单词变复数加es的情况：

Negro hero tomato potato

黑人英雄吃土豆和西红柿。

8.关于非延续性动词：

begin leave go borrow come return join die buy arrive

开始离去，借来还，出生入死，买到家。

9.过去时：

过去时的句子变化口诀：过去时，时过去。过去事态是否是，过去时间是标志。否定句很简单，did之后not添。疑问句也不难，did置于主语前。过去置于动词前，谓语动词需还

原。

巧记动词过去时形式-ed的变化：

（1）变化规则：动词变化很好记，一般末尾加-ed。如果词尾e有个紧跟其后加个d。辅音字母加y，要y把变i，特殊变化有熟记，保你一定考第一。

（2）读音规则：

清（清辅音）读清[t]，浊读浊[d]，[t][d]后面读[id]。

10.关于基数词的书写：

基数词不难记，12以内词各异，13数到19级，teen莫丢弃。20、30到90， 尾随ty是整十，说到几使几，中有 “—”要强记，遇到整百要警惕。

11.关于基数词变序数词：

基变序，有规律，123肩靠肩。8去e，9去t， ve要用f替，辅（音）后y， y→ie，th结尾莫大意，若遇数字几十几，只变个位就可以。

12.修饰名词的大致词序排列：

(A.)美圆小旧黄，法国木书房。“美” 代表描述性的词， “圆”代表形状， “小” 代表大小， “旧” 代表新旧、年龄， “黄” 代表颜色， “法国” 代表产地 “木” 代表质地 “书” 代表名词性定语说明用途。如：

(1*.)The first beautiful little white Chinese stone bridge.

第一座美丽的中国小白石桥。

(2*.)A tall intelligent young Chinese officer.

一个聪慧的个子很高的年轻的中国军官。

(B.)或者用：BTH中国英语学习网

县官行令，杀国才；植树苗，大新颜。

县（限定词）官（冠词）行（形容词）令（表年龄的词），杀国（表产地的词）才（材料）；植（指示代词）树（数词）苗（描述性的词），大（表大小的词）新（表新旧的词）颜（表颜色的词）。

如：

(1*.)A few new major urban highways.

几条新的主要城区公路。

(2*.)Some sour green eating apple.

一些酸绿的食用苹果。

13.关于被动语态的使用：

动作谁做的不知道，说出谁做没必要。

接受动作要强调，被动语态最为妙。

14.关于五种简单句：

英语句子万万千，五大句型把线牵。

句子中间为动词，后接语是关键。

系动词后接表语，vi独身无牵连。

vt又可分三类，单宾双宾最常见。

15.双元音也好背，合口集中八个位。

辅音共计二十八，七浊一清又八对。

四个连对也包括，有气无声清辅音。

有声无气浊辅音，发音特点应掌握。

16.使役动词后接动词不定式做宾语补足语省略“to”的特殊动词：

一些动词要掌握，一听hear,二看see watch三感觉feel， make let help[2],再加动词不带to,help是个两面派，其他动词非这块。还可以掌握“八字言”一感feel,二听hear, listen to, 三让have, let, make,四看see, look at, observe, watch 后只接动名词。

推荐第3篇：初中英语语法学习口诀荟萃

初中英语语法学习口诀荟萃

一． 知识口诀化，朗朗上口，得心应手。

“顺口溜”的特有韵律会使抽象、烦琐的词语和语法知识、规则化难为易，便于记忆，增强了学生的学习热情和学习信心，学生的学习成绩会直线上升，有的记忆深刻，甚至会终生难忘。

如：

1.最初的简单动词的学习。

来是come，去是go。点头yes，摇头no。再见要用goodbye，谢谢要说thank you。

2.关于Be的用法：BTH

我用am，你用 are，is用在他、她、它，凡是复数都用are。不能错来，不能差。

3.关于冠词的使用：BTH

不见原因（元音），别施恩（n）。

4.不用冠词的部分情况：BTH

季节、月份、节假日，三餐、球类和星期。

5.以-fe结尾变复数只加s的单词：

gulfroofchiefserfbliefproofhandkerchief

海湾边，屋顶上，首领奴仆两相望，谁说他们无信仰，证据写在手帕上。

6.复习以-f (e)结尾的名词变复数：

leafhalfselfwifeknifeshelfwolf

thief

树叶半数自己黄，妻子拿刀去割粮，

架后窜出一只狼，就像强盗逃命忙。

7.关于以o 结尾的单词变复数加es的情况：

Negroherotomatopotato

黑人英雄吃土豆和西红柿。

8.关于非延续性动词：

beginleavegoborrowcomereturnjoindiebuy arrive

开始离去，借来还，出生入死，买到家。

9.过去时：

过去时的句子变化口诀：过去时，时过去。过去事态是否是，过去时间是标志。否定句很简单，did之后not添。疑问句也不难，did置于主语前。过去置于动词前，谓语动词需还原。

巧记动词过去时形式-ed的变化：

（1）变化规则：动词变化很好记，一般末尾加-ed。如果词尾e有个紧跟其后加个d。辅音字母加y，要y把变i，特殊变化有熟记，保你一定考第一。

（2）读音规则：

清（清辅音）读清[t]，浊读浊[d]，[t][d]后面读[id]。

10.关于基数词的书写：

基数词不难记，12以内词各异，13数到19级，teen莫丢弃。20、30到90， 尾随ty是整十，说到几使几，中有 “—”要强记，遇到整百要警惕。

11.关于基数词变序数词：

基变序，有规律，123肩靠肩。8去e，9去t， ve要用f替，辅（音）后y， y→ie，th结尾莫大意，若遇数字几十几，只变个位就可以。

12.修饰名词的大致词序排列：

(A.)美圆小旧黄，法国木书房。“美” 代表描述性的词， “圆”代表形状， “小” 代表大小， “旧” 代表新旧、年龄， “黄” 代表颜色， “法国” 代表产地 “木” 代表质地 “书” 代表名词性定语说明用途。如：

(1*.)The first beautiful little white Chinese stone bridge.

第一座美丽的中国小白石桥。

(2*.)A tall intelligent young Chinese officer.

一个聪慧的个子很高的年轻的中国军官。

(B.)或者用：BTH中国英语学习网

县官行令，杀国才；植树苗，大新颜。

县（限定词）官（冠词）行（形容词）令（表年龄的词），杀国（表产地的词）才（材料）；植（指示代词）树（数词）苗（描述性的词），大（表大小的词）新（表新旧的词）颜（表颜色的词）。

如：

(1*.)Afew new major urban highways.

几条新的主要城区公路。

(2*.)Some sour green eating apple.

一些酸绿的食用苹果。

13.关于被动语态的使用：

动作谁做的不知道，说出谁做没必要。

接受动作要强调，被动语态最为妙。

14.关于五种简单句：

英语句子万万千，五大句型把线牵。

句子中间为动词，后接语是关键。

系动词后接表语，vi独身无牵连。

vt又可分三类，单宾双宾最常见。

15.双元音也好背，合口集中八个位。

辅音共计二十八，七浊一清又八对。

四个连对也包括，有气无声清辅音。

有声无气浊辅音，发音特点应掌握。

16.使役动词后接动词不定式做宾语补足语省略“to”的特殊动词：

一些动词要掌握，一听hear,二看seewatch三感觉feel， make lethelp[2],再加动词不带to,help是个两面派，其他动词非这块。还可以掌握“八字言”一感feel,二听

hear, listen to, 三让have, let, make,四看see, look at, observe, watch 后只接动名词。

一、冠词基本用法

【速记口诀】

名词是秃子，常要戴帽子，

可数名词单，须用a或an，

辅音前用a， an在元音前，

若为特指时，则须用定冠，

复数不可数，泛指the不见，

碰到代词时，冠词均不现。

【妙语诠释】冠词是中考必考的语法知识之一，也是中考考查的主要对象。以上口诀包括的意思有：①名词在一般情况下不单用，常常要和冠词连用；②表示不确指的可数名词单数前要用不定冠词a或an，确指时要用定冠词the；③如复数名词表示泛指，名词前有this，these，my，some等时就不用冠词。

二、名词单数变复数规则

【速记口诀】

单数变复数，规则要记住，

一般加s，特殊有几处：

/s/结尾，es不离后，

末尾字母o，大多加s，

两人有两菜，es不离口，

词尾f、fe，s前有v和e；

没有规则词，必须单独记。

【妙语诠释】 ①大部分单数可数名词变为复数要加s，但如果单词以/t?蘩/、/?蘩/、/s/发音结尾(也就是单词如果以ch，sh，s，x等结尾)，则一般加es；②以o结尾的单词除了两人(negro，hero)两菜(tomato，potato)加es外，其余一般加s；③以f或fe结尾的单词一般是把f，fe变为ve再加s；④英语中还有些单词没有规则，需要特殊记忆，如child—children，mouse—mice，deer—deer，sheep—sheep，Chinese—Chinese，ox—oxen，man—men，woman—women，foot—feet，tooth—teeth。

三、名词所有格用法

【速记口诀】

名词所有格，表物是“谁的”，

若为生命词，加“’s”即可行，

词尾有s，仅把逗号择；

并列名词后，各自和共有，

前者分别加，后者最后加；

若为无生命词，of所有格，

前后须倒置，此是硬规则。

【妙语诠释】 ①有生命的名词所有格一般加s，但如果名词以s结尾，则只加“’”；②并列名词所有格表示各自所有时，分别加“’s”，如果是共有，则只在最后名词加“’s”；③如果是无生命的名词则用of表示所有格，这里需要注意它们的顺序与汉语不同，A of B要翻译为B的A。

四、接不定式作宾语的动词

【速记口诀】 三个希望两答应，两个要求莫拒绝； 设法学会做决定，不要假装在选择。 【妙语诠释】 三个希望两答应：hope，wish，want，agree，promise 两个要求莫拒绝：demand，ask，refuse 设法学会做决定：manage，learn，decide 不要假装在选择：petend，choose

五、接动名词作宾语的动词

以下是一些介词的使用口诀,希望对大家有用：

上午、晚要用in，at黎明、午夜、点与分。

年、月、年月、季节、周，阳光、灯、影、衣、冒in。

将来时态in...以后，小处at大处in。

有形with无形by，语言、单位、材料in。

特征、方面与方式，心情成语惯用in。

介词at和to表方向，攻击、位置、恶、善分。

日子、日期、年月日，星期加上早、午、晚，

收音、农场、值日on，关于、基础、靠、著论。

着、罢、出售、偷、公、假，故意、支付、相反，准。

特定时日和\"一„„就\"，on后常接动名词。

年、月、日加早、午、晚，of之前on代in。

步行、驴、马、玩笑on，cab，carriage则用in。

at山脚、门口、在当前，速、温、日落、价、核心。

工具、和、同随with，具有、独立、就、原因。

就„„来说宾译主，对、有、方状、表细分。

海、陆、空、车、偶、被by，单数、人类know to man。

this、that、tomorrow，yesterday，next、last、one。

接年、月、季、星期、周，介词省略已习惯。

over、under正上下，above、below则不然，

若与数量词连用，混合使用亦无关。

beyond超出、无、不能，against靠着，对与反。

besides，except分内外，among之内along沿。

同类比较except，加for异类记心间。

原状because of,、owing to、due to表语形容词

under后接修、建中，of、from物、化分。

before、after表一点, ago、later表一段。

before能接完成时，ago过去极有限。

since以来during间，since时态多变换。

与之相比beside，除了last but one。

复不定for、找、价、原，对、给、段、去、为、作、赞。

快到、对、向towards，工、学、军、城、北、上、南。

but for否定用虚拟，复合介词待后言。

ing型由于鉴，除了除外与包合。

之后、关于、在......方面，有关介词须记全。

in内to外，表位置，山、水、国界to在前。

两大数词基和序，前表数量后第几。 构成先谈基数词，1至12请认真记。 13至19teen结尾齐，ty结尾表示几十。若要表达几十几，几十短横1到9。 One hundred 一百记，若表几百几十几。 几百 and几十几，基数规律上述里。 再把序数谈仔细，第一至三独立记。第四至十九结尾th,第廿到九十有规律。 基数基础y变ieth。第几十几有特例，第几十由基数起，几用序数有道理。

第一百one hundred。若说第一百几十几。 One hundred and第几十几。谈此即告一段落。

序有缩式莫忘记，上述须用心体味。

推荐第4篇：中考英语语法总结：巧记口诀汇总

中考英语语法巧记口诀汇总

很多同学认为英语语法枯燥难学，其实只要用心并采用适当的学习方法，我们就可以愉快地学会英语，掌握语法规则。特此搜集、组编了以下语法口诀，希望对即将参加中考的同学们有所帮助。

一、冠词基本用法

【速记口诀】

名词是秃子，常要戴帽子，

可数名词单，须用a或an，

辅音前用a， an在元音前，

若为特指时，则须用定冠，

复数不可数，泛指the不见，

碰到代词时，冠词均不现。

【妙语诠释】冠词是中考必考的语法知识之一，也是中考考查的主要对象。以上口诀包括的意思有：①名词在一般情况下不单用，常常要和冠词连用；②表示不确指的可数名词单数前要用不定冠词a或an，确指时要用定冠词the；③如复数名词表示泛指，名词前有this，these，my，some等时就不用冠词。

二、名词单数变复数规则

【速记口诀】

单数变复数，规则要记住，

一般加s，特殊有几处：

/s/结尾，es不离后，

末尾字母o，大多加s，

两人有两菜，es不离口，

词尾f、fe，s前有v和e；

没有规则词，必须单独记。

【妙语诠释】 ①大部分单数可数名词变为复数要加s，但如果单词以/t?蘩/、/?蘩/、/s/发音结尾(也就是单词如果以ch，sh，s，x等结尾)，则一般加es；②以o结尾的单词除了两人(negro，hero)两菜(tomato，potato)加es外，其余一般加s；③以f或fe结尾的单词一般是把f，fe变为ve再加s；④英语中还有些单词没有规则，需要特殊记忆，如child—children，mouse—mice，deer—deer，sheep—sheep，Chinese—Chinese，ox—oxen，man—men，woman—women，foot—feet，tooth—teeth。

三、名词所有格用法

【速记口诀】

名词所有格，表物是“谁的”，

若为生命词，加“’s”即可行，

词尾有s，仅把逗号择；

并列名词后，各自和共有，

前者分别加，后者最后加；

若为无生命词，of所有格，

前后须倒置，此是硬规则。

【妙语诠释】 ①有生命的名词所有格一般加s，但如果名词以s结尾，则只加“’”；②并列名词所有格表示各自所有时，分别加“’s”，如果是共有，则只在最后名词加“’s”；③如果是无生命的名词则用of表示所有格，这里需要注意它们的顺序与汉语不同，A of B要翻译为B的A。

四、接不定式作宾语的动词

【速记口诀】

三个希望两答应，两个要求莫拒绝；

设法学会做决定，不要假装在选择。

【妙语诠释】 三个希望两答应：hope，wish，want，agree，promise

两个要求莫拒绝：demand，ask，refuse

设法学会做决定：manage，learn，decide

不要假装在选择：petend，choose

五、接动名词作宾语的动词

【速记口诀】

Mrs.P Black mied a beef bag.(P·布莱克夫人丢了一个牛肉袋。)

【妙语诠释】 该句话中每个字母代表了一个动词或短语，这些动词要求后面跟动名词作宾语。这些动词分别是：

M=mind， r=risk， s=succeed in，P=practice，B=be busy， l=look forward to，a=admit，c=can’t help， k=keep on， m=mi，i=insist on，s=suggest，s=stop，e=enjoy，d=delay，

a=avoid，b=be worth，a=advise，g=give up。

六、不定式作宾语补足语时省to的动词

【速记口诀】

一感，二听，三让，四看，半帮助

【妙语诠释】 一感：feel；二听：hear，listen to；三让：make，let，have；四看：see，notice，watch，ob-serve；半帮助：help。

七、形容词和副词比较等级用法

【速记口诀】

1.比较级与最高级：两者比较than相连，三者比较the在前。

2.同级比较：同级比较用原形，as…as永不离；as…as加not，只言两者是同一，若是not so…as，后强前弱不看齐。

【妙语诠释】 ①比较级通常和than连用，而最高级通常跟有定冠词the；②同级比较一般用as…as表示“与…一样”，这时谁强谁弱不能比较出来，而not so…as则表示后者比前者强，翻译为“不如……”。

八、反意疑问句用法

【速记口诀】

反意问句三要点，前后谓语正相反；

短句not如出现，必须缩写是习惯；

最后一点应注意，短句主语代词填。

【妙语诠释】 ①反意疑问句的构成应该是“肯定的陈述句+否定的疑问”或“否定的陈述句+肯定的疑问”；②在短句中not必须与do，will，can等组成缩写形式；③在简短问句中，疑问句的主语必须是代词，而不能用名词形式。

九、感叹句用法

【速记口诀】

感叹句，并不难，what、how放句前；

强调名词用what，其余用how很简单。

【妙语诠释】 由what引导的感叹句一般修饰名词，而how引导的感叹句一般修饰形容词、副词或句子。

十、宾语从句用法

【速记口诀】

宾语从句须注意，几点事项应牢记。

一是关键引导词，不同句子词相异。

陈述句子用that；一般疑问是否(if，whether)替；特殊问句更好办，引导还用疑问词。

二是时态常变化，主句不同从句异。主句若为现在时，从句时态应看意；主句若为过去时，从句时态向前移。

三是语序要记清，从句永保陈述序。

【妙语诠释】宾语从句应注意三点：①引导词，陈述句一般由that引导，这时的that可以省略；一般疑问句则由if或whe-ther引导；而特殊疑问句则由特殊疑问词引导。②时态，主句是现在时态，从句可用所需要的任何时态；但如果主句是过去时态，从句时态所表示时间一般往前移一个时间段。③语序，宾语从句永远要用陈述句顺序。 1.My son got up late this morning.He only had _______ for breakfast.

A.two bread

B.two slice of bread

C.two slices of bread

D.two slices of breads

2._______ room is big and bright.They like it very much.

A.Tom and Sam

B.Tom’s and Sam

C.Tom and Sam’s

D.Tom’s and Sam’s

3.—Do you know how many ______ a horse has and how many _____ a bee has?

—Of course I know.

A.teeth; feet B.tooth; foot

C.foot; teeth D.teeth; foot

4.__________ woman in a purple skirt is Betty’s mother.A.The B.A C.An D./

5.Now telephones are very popular and they are much ______ than before.

A.cheap B.cheaper

C.cheapest D.the cheaper

6.—Hi, Tom.Is your brother as active as you?

—No, he’s a quiet boy.He is _________.

A.le outgoing than me

B.not so calm as

C.more active than I

D.as outgoing as I

7.English ________ in many countries, but Chinese _______ their own language.

A.is spoken; speaks

B.speaks; is spoken

C.is spoken; speak

D.is spoken; is spoken

8.The young man was often seen _______ by the lake.

A.to draw B.to drawing

C.drawing D.drew

9.—So hot in the claroom.Would you mind ______ the window?

—OK, I’ll do it right now.

A.not closing B.not opening

C.closing D.opening

10.—_______ weather! It’s raining!

—Bad luck! We can’t go climbing today.

A.What bad B.What a bad

C.How bad D.How a bad

Keys：1.C 2.C 3.A 4.A 5.B 6.A 7.C 8.C 9.D 10.A 初中英语语法学习口诀荟萃

一． 知识口诀化，朗朗上口，得心应手。 “顺口溜”的特有韵律会使抽象、烦琐的词语和语法知识、规则化难为易，便于记忆，增强了学生的学习热情和学习信心，学生的学习成绩会直线上升，有的记忆深刻，甚至会终生难忘。

如：

1.最初的简单动词的学习。

来是come，去是go。点头yes，摇头no。再见要用goodbye，谢谢要说thank you。 2.关于Be的用法：BTH 我用am，你用 are，is用在他、她、它，凡是复数都用are。不能错来，不能差。 3.关于冠词的使用：BTH 不见原因（元音），别施恩（n）。 4.不用冠词的部分情况：BTH 季节、月份、节假日，三餐、球类和星期。 5.以-fe结尾变复数只加s的单词：

gulf roof chief serf blief proof handkerchief 海湾边，屋顶上，首领奴仆两相望，谁说他们无信仰，证据写在手帕上。 6.复习以-f (e)结尾的名词变复数： leaf half self wife knife shelf wolf thief 树叶半数自己黄，妻子拿刀去割粮， 架后窜出一只狼，就像强盗逃命忙。 7.关于以o 结尾的单词变复数加es的情况： Negro hero tomato potato 黑人英雄吃土豆和西红柿。 8.关于非延续性动词：

begin leave go borrow come return join die buy arrive 开始离去，借来还，出生入死，买到家。 9.过去时：

过去时的句子变化口诀：过去时，时过去。过去事态是否是，过去时间是标志。否定句很简单，did之后not添。疑问句也不难，did置于主语前。过去置于动词前，谓语动词需还原。

巧记动词过去时形式-ed的变化：

（1）变化规则：动词变化很好记，一般末尾加-ed。如果词尾e有个紧跟其后加个d。辅音字母加y，要y把变i，特殊变化有熟记，保你一定考第一。

（2）读音规则：

清（清辅音）读清[t]，浊读浊[d]，[t][d]后面读[id]。 10.关于基数词的书写：

基数词不难记，12以内词各异，13数到19级，teen莫丢弃。20、30到90， 尾随ty是整十，说到几使几，中有 “—”要强记，遇到整百要警惕。

11.关于基数词变序数词：

基变序，有规律，123肩靠肩。8去e，9去t， ve要用f替，辅（音）后y， y→ie，th结尾莫大意，若遇数字几十几，只变个位就可以。

12.修饰名词的大致词序排列：

(A.)美圆小旧黄，法国木书房。“美” 代表描述性的词， “圆”代表形状， “小” 代表大小， “旧” 代表新旧、年龄， “黄” 代表颜色， “法国” 代表产地 “木” 代表质地 “书” 代表名词性定语说明用途。如：

(1*.)The first beautiful little white Chinese stone bridge.第一座美丽的中国小白石桥。

(2*.)A tall intelligent young Chinese officer.一个聪慧的个子很高的年轻的中国军官。 (B.)或者用：BTH中国英语学习网 县官行令，杀国才；植树苗，大新颜。

县（限定词）官（冠词）行（形容词）令（表年龄的词），杀国（表产地的词）才（材料）；植（指示代词）树（数词）苗（描述性的词），大（表大小的词）新（表新旧的词）颜（表颜色的词）。

如：

(1*.)A few new major urban highways.几条新的主要城区公路。

(2*.)Some sour green eating apple.一些酸绿的食用苹果。 13.关于被动语态的使用：

动作谁做的不知道，说出谁做没必要。 接受动作要强调，被动语态最为妙。 14.关于五种简单句：

英语句子万万千，五大句型把线牵。 句子中间为动词，后接语是关键。 系动词后接表语，vi独身无牵连。 vt又可分三类，单宾双宾最常见。 15.双元音也好背，合口集中八个位。 辅音共计二十八，七浊一清又八对。 四个连对也包括，有气无声清辅音。 有声无气浊辅音，发音特点应掌握。

16.使役动词后接动词不定式做宾语补足语省略“to”的特殊动词：

一些动词要掌握，一听hear,二看see watch三感觉feel， make let help[2],再加动词不带to,help是个两面派，其他动词非这块。还可以掌握“八字言”一感feel,二听hear, listen to, 三让have, let, make,四看see, look at, observe, watch 后只接动名词。

初中英语其它口诀

听力口诀

听力训练，每天不断；听后朗诵，先易后难； 分清考点，速记要点；轻取所需，音绝何难？

阅读理解口诀

读分精泛，快慢相间；预想在先，生词不看； 抓住观点，重点三看；行云流水，字里行间； 材料观点，铭记心间；牢记问题，抓住关键；

回问查看，比较选项；选择答案，排除在先； 先易后难，不可弄反；调整节奏，计时答完； 表达方式，必须牢记；防止遗忘，勤于动笔； 边答边查，防止题落；节省时间，避免遗憾。

英语单词记忆“口诀” (1)记单词，要“五到”，眼嘴手脑齐开炮；读写背默各几遍，印象清晰记得牢。 (“五到”记忆法) (2)记过单词莫忘记，几天之后再看看；似忘非忘又温习，反反复复印心间。(循环记忆法) (3)单词多了别心烦，分片分组来攻占；五个一组先吃掉，几组连成一大片。(分组记忆法) (4)结合词组句子记，有情有景有意义；重点段落须背诵，理解深刻有乐趣。(理解记忆法) (5)要想单词不写错，语音一关还得过；读音规律掌握好，拼写自然少差错。(语音记忆法) (6)分类归纳便于记，同类词汇放一起。(归纳记忆法) (7)同义近义反义词，辨析对比来记忆，比较对照才开窍，印象深刻记得牢。(对比记忆法) (8)单词长了容易忘，卡片纸条来帮忙；mathematics不好记，纸条贴到《数学》上。 (卡片记忆法) (9)构词法，要学习，前缀后缀有规律；转换常把词类变，合成本是二合一。(构词记忆法) (10)课外读物有情趣，单词复现便于记；只要坚持常阅读，一举几得大有益。 (阅读记忆法) 以下是一些介词的使用口诀,希望对大家有用：

上午、晚要用in，at黎明、午夜、点与分。

年、月、年月、季节、周，阳光、灯、影、衣、冒in。

将来时态in...以后，小处at大处in。

有形with无形by，语言、单位、材料in。

特征、方面与方式，心情成语惯用in。

介词at和to表方向，攻击、位置、恶、善分。

日子、日期、年月日，星期加上早、午、晚，

收音、农场、值日on，关于、基础、靠、著论。

着、罢、出售、偷、公、假，故意、支付、相反，准。

特定时日和\"一……就\"，on后常接动名词。

年、月、日加早、午、晚，of之前on代in。

步行、驴、马、玩笑on，cab，carriage则用in。

at山脚、门口、在当前，速、温、日落、价、核心。

工具、和、同随with，具有、独立、就、原因。

就……来说宾译主，对、有、方状、表细分。

海、陆、空、车、偶、被by，单数、人类know to man。 this、that、tomorrow，yesterday，next、last、one。

接年、月、季、星期、周，介词省略已习惯。

over、under正上下，above、below则不然，

若与数量词连用，混合使用亦无关。

beyond超出、无、不能，against靠着，对与反。

besides，except分内外，among之内along沿。

同类比较except，加for异类记心间。

原状because of,、owing to、due to表语形容词

under后接修、建中，of、from物、化分。

before、after表一点, ago、later表一段。

before能接完成时，ago过去极有限。

since以来during间，since时态多变换。

与之相比beside，除了last but one。

复不定for、找、价、原，对、给、段、去、为、作、赞。

快到、对、向towards，工、学、军、城、北、上、南。

but for否定用虚拟，复合介词待后言。

ing型由于鉴，除了除外与包合。

之后、关于、在......方面，有关介词须记全。

in内to外，表位置，山、水、国界to在前。

1.数词变化规律及读法口诀

两大数词基和序，前表数量后第几。 构成先谈基数词，1至12请认真记。 13至19teen结尾齐，ty结尾表示几十。若要表达几十几，几十短横1到9。 One hundred 一百记，若表几百几十几。 几百 and几十几，基数规律上述里。 再把序数谈仔细，第一至三独立记。第四至十九结尾th,第廿到九十有规律。 基数基础y变ieth。第几十几有特例，第几十由基数起，几用序数有道理。

第一百one hundred。若说第一百几十几。 One hundred and第几十几。谈此即告一段落。

序有缩式莫忘记，上述须用心体味。

2.句子种类口诀

句子按用途分四大体，陈述疑问感叹和祈使。陈述用来叙述一件事。疑问主要用来提问题。

祈使表达命令和请求。表达强烈感情感叹句。上述九是句种之定义。祈使主语you被抛弃。

若将其变成否定形式，动词之前加don’t是正理。

3.陈述句变感叹句口诀

英语陈述变感叹两句套。What 或How加其他成分表。What [a(an)]形加名用的妙。 剩余照写句末用感叹号。 How 后副和形是正确道，其后照写感叹号堪称妙。

4.一般现在时用法及句型转换口诀

经常习惯动作和真理，是一般现在时的定义。构成除单三皆动原式。若逢动词第三人称体，

动词变单三式有道理。若要变成否定的形式，动词原形之前加don’t,除单三人称外无特例。

单三式前doesn’t动原基。句首Do,Does疑问起，Does用单三人称限制，单三还原形没大问题。

5.变动词单三人称口诀

一般情况动词尾-s加。O,s,ch,sh结尾“-es”没有差。 辅音加y 去y为“-ies”是方法。

6.现在进行时及句型转换口诀

现在正在进行之动作，用现在进行时来掌舵。构成be加现在分词妥，be的用法如同系动词。

切记be是助动词没错，be后面加not否定拓。Be提句首疑问有把握，上述内容记清好处多。

7.现在分词构成口诀

词尾直加-ing是一般式，若遇无音e去之加-ing。 重读闭音一辅音字母尾，双写该字母-ing是正里。

8.形容词和副词比较级和最高级构成口诀

结尾直加-er,-est属一般，详细构成方法逐一来侃谈。 一辅音结尾重读闭音节看，辅音双写-er,-est是习惯。 辅音加y(ly)除外有型感，按照去y,-er,-iest方法办。 上述皆属单音部分双音段，下面把多音节规律来看看。 词前加more,most此规律唤。规则变化到此已全都谈完。 有些不规则变化请你记全。“双好”better,best记的宽。 “坏病”worse,worst莫记乱。“双多” more,most不用管 “老、远”两种形式别记篡，“有点”le,least记清盼。

9.感观使役动词记忆和使用口诀

1.记忆口诀：二听四看一感觉，使役动词有三个。或：一感二听三使四看。

一感；feel 二听：hear,listen to 三使：make ,let ,have 四看：look at,see,watch,notice 使用口诀：感使动词真奇怪，to在句中象妖怪。 主动句里它走开，被动句里它回来。 动词let要除外，to词可来可不来。

10.规则动词加-ed的读音口诀 元音后[t]，浊音后[d]，[t][d ]后读[id]。 注：浊音包括浊辅音和元音。

11.时刻表达法口诀

时刻表达法作用大，衣食住行离不开它。整点时把点钟数打，时分俱全不好表达。 请记下列几种方法：先时后分莫给弄差。若要说明几点过几分，可把past和after来抓。

前分后时不能搞差，要说几点几分差， to前分后时来表达。

12.形容词和副词的比较等级及用法句型口诀

一者比较用原级。比较级限二者比。三者三者往上比，最高级的用法起。 若要比项掌握齐，比较范围要搞细。比较级二句型记，做出句子没问题。 若甲乙程度相同，as…as 结构体。甲某方面不及乙，用 not so/as…as表示。 上述内容全记起，比较等级谈完毕。

句型转换口诀教学法运用例析

口诀

句型变化很简单， / 先把句中动词看：/ be may must will can，/ 否定句not加后边。/ 一般问句也不难，/ 助情动词放句前；/ 两种回答yes no，/ 句首动词人后面。/ 没有现成怎么办？/ do does did来相伴，/ 三单式过去要还原。/ 特殊问句更简单，/ 疑问词后跟一般 。/ 事物职业等what，/ who人where问地点，/ whose谁的所有权。/ 数量how many复后边，/ how much不可数和价钱。/ why问原因慢慢谈，/ what time when时间， / how old岁数多少年？/ how be人身永康健！

例析

上述口诀表明：句型变化的关键是识别和取决于句中的动词。如果句中有现成的 be ，have，used，may ，must ，will ，can等助动词或情态动词，则在其后直接加上not即构成否定句；将其提于句首则成为一般疑问句，在简略回答中，除there be句型外，在yes或no后边一般要使用“人称代词主格+助动词或情态动词成分”，其中的助动词或情态动词应该与问句保持一致。例如，(1) That’s her grandfather over there（改为否定句和一般疑问句并回答）。根据口诀，我们发现句中有现成的 be动词is ，不需要其他的助动词来协助，故本句的否定句为：That’s not her grandfather over there；一般疑问句及回答为：Is that her grandfather over there？Yes，he is；/ No，he isn’t.(2) Tom used to read Chinese histories.（改为否定句和一般疑问句并回答），句中的used是一个突破口，故否定句为Tom used not to read Chinese histories；一般问句和回答为Used Tom to read Chinese histories ？Yes，he used；/ No，he usedn’t.但根据传统习惯，本句也可以将used视为行为动词 use的过去式，故其否定句和一般疑问句及回答分别是Tom didn’t use to read Chinese histories和Did Tom use to read Chinese histories ？Yes，he did；No，he didn’t .“没有现成怎么办”指的是句中没有be ，have，used，may ，must ，will ，can等助动词或情态动词的情况。如果没有，则要根据动词的时态和形式借用相应的助动词 do（帮助行为动词原形），does（帮助行为动词的第三人称单数形式）或 did（帮助行为动词的过去时形式）来协助构成否定句或问句；“三单式过去要还原” 指的是在用 does或 did协助构成否定句或问句后，原句中的动词第三人称单数形式或过去式必须改为动词原形，否则就犯了重复的错误，这也是许多学生惯犯的一种错误，令老师头疼。例(3) Li Ping goes shopping with her mother on Sundays（改为否定句和一般疑问句并回答）。句中有三单式goes , 立刻就联想到does的助动词功能，故本题的答案分别为Li Ping doesn’t go shopping with her mother on Sundays和Does Li Ping go shopping with her mother on Sundays？Yes，she does；/ No，she doesn’t.但要注意，do和have还有行为动词的功能，这是学生在做句型转换练习时遇到的又一难题，误将句中的do或have视为助动词而导致错误的结果。如(4) My brother does his homework in the evening（改为否定句和一般疑问句），能够想到正确答案My brother doesn’t do his homework in the evening和Does your brother do his homework in the evening?的同学为数不多。(5) Jim’s parents have lunch in the factory（改为否定句和一般疑问句并回答），许多学生就错解为Jim’s parents haven’t lunch in the factory和Have Jim’s parents lunch in the factory? Yes , they have ; / No , they haven’t .而本句中的have是行为动词“吃” 的意思，正确做法应该为Jim’s parents don’t have lunch in the factory和 Do Jim’s parents have lunch in the factory? Yes , they do ;/ No, they don’t .

“疑问词后跟一般”意思是特殊疑问句由“疑问代词或疑问副词+一般疑问句”构成，只要学生掌握了一般疑问句的转换要点和各类疑问代词或疑问副词的意义和功能，特殊疑问句以及其他的句型变化就会迎刃而解。例如，口诀中的“事物职业等what”，其意义功能指的是what用来对事物、职业、姓名、颜色等提问，如(6) My e-mail addre is cindyj@pep.com.cn（对画线部分提问）为What is your e-mail addre? “who人where问地点”是指who用于对人物、身份、关系等句子成分提问而where用于对地点状语提问，例(7) Kate’s shoes are under the bed（对画线部分提问）为Where are Kate’s shoes? 而表面看起来很相似的另一个句子The shoes under the bed are Kate’s（对画线部分提问），学生做起来就又感到纳闷了，是用where还是which提问呢？其纳闷的根本原因是没有弄懂画线部分under the bed在本句中是后置定语，故本题的正确解答应为Which shoes are Kate’s? “数量how many复后边”即对数量提问用how many，后面接复数形式，例如(8) There are fifty-two students in Tom’s cla（对画线部分提问）为How many students are there in Tom’s cla？How many后边接的是复数形式students和are .how much用于对不可数名词或价钱提问，如(9) The black pants are $75（对画线部分提问）为How much (money) are the black pants? 当然，本句也可以表示为What’s the price of the black pants? “how be人身永康健”即How be sb.? 一般用于询问某人的身体健康状况，如(10) ——How are you?—— I’m well, thank you .

推荐第5篇：帮你三分钟搞定英语语法(记口诀、背歌谣)

鲤鱼网（http://）

帮你三分钟搞定英语语法（记口诀、背歌谣）

重庆华章整理

还在为英语语法而苦恼？快来看看下面这些口诀及歌谣，帮你三分钟搞定英语语法

1、现在进行时

Look, Listen是标志，现在进行正发生；

有时now在句中现，“be＋v－ing”时态成。

若问be用何形式，须看主语数、人称。

三单is我am,你和复数are紧随(即：He ／ She is, I am． We, you, they后are紧跟)。 v－ing形式更好记，三种构成要分清。

一般问句be提前，be后not否定成！

2、一般现在时

一般现在时态中，动词一般用原形。

表述事实讲真理，习惯动作常发生。

动词词尾加－s(es)，只表单数三人称。

若变一般疑问句，得看句型是哪种。

系表结构和there be, be放句首即完成；

若遇实义动词句，do或does莫忘记！

3、一般过去时

肯定句的过去式。

规则动词加ed，

不规则的必须记。

否定形式疑问句，

没有be加did。

如把did加在前，

动词还要归原形。

4、基数词变序数词

基变序，很容易，一二三，特殊记，th从四起。八去t来九去e，遇到ve，f替，ty 变为tie，后加th莫迟疑，若想表示几十几，只变个位就可以。

5、时间介词巧记歌

年、月、季节前用in，（如：in 2008, in September, in spring）

日期前面行不通。

遇到几号或星期

改用on来做代替，(如：on January 1，on Wedesday)

上午、下午、晚上仍用in。(如：in the morning／afternoon／evening)

若是某日上下午，也是用on才能行。 (如：on the evening of the Mid－autumn Day) 正午、夜里用at，(如：at noon, at night)

时、分用法也同理。（如：, at two, at two）

如若“差”点须加to，(如：two to two)

如若“过”点改past。(如：half past one)

多说勤练牢牢记，学好英语非儿戏。

6、特殊的形容词、副词的比较级、最高级

一分为二是三个，(指同一个形容词原形但是有两种比较级和最高级形式) 两个“远”“来”一个“老”。

合二为一共三对（指：两个单词的比较级和最高级完全相同）

“坏、病”两“多”并两“好”。

还有一词双意含， (指原形表示“小的、少的”，但是比较级和最高级却只表示“较\\最少的”

只译“少”来不译“小”。

解释：

两个“远”“来”一个“老”。

即：far分别为： far: farther表“距离\\较远的”farthest

further表“程度”上的：“进一步的”furthest；

late分别为：later 表时间上\\较远的，相距较长的latest

latter 表顺序上的后者last

old分别为： older表“实际的年龄、较大的”oldest

elder表“长幼辈分、较高的”eldest

“坏、病”两“多”并两“好”。

即：bad/ill—worst—worst；many/much—more—most；good/well—better—best

只译“少”来不译“小”。

即：little—le(较少的，比„少的)——lest（最少的）

7、比较等级的运用

原级用在as„as间，

比较级用在than前。

and连接两个比较级，

说明“越来越怎样”。

三者以上最高级，

副词前可不加the。

Even, much和a little，

也常修饰比较级。

8、宾语从句

宾语从句三要素，

引导词、语序、时态。

引导词分三情况，

陈述句that可省略。

一般疑问句if或whether。

碰到特殊疑问句，

疑问词来担此任。

语序总体为主谓。

疑问词从句主语，

语序不必去改变。

从句时态主句定，

如果主句是过去，

从句相应作改变，

客观真理仍现在。

9、be的几个顺口溜

(1)我用am，你用are，单三is复数are。

(2)I用am，you用are，非I非you是is，复数全部都用are。

(3)代词主格的顺口溜：

I是我来we复数，你和你们都用you；

he，she，it男、女、它，复数一律把they用。

10、规则动词变为过去式

口诀：“一改、二多、三少、四刚好”

即有规则的一般过去时的动词，

“一改”，以“y”结尾,把“y”去掉改为“i”再加“ed”，如：“study”→“studied”； “二多”，重读闭音节结尾的动词，双写末尾辅音字母再加“ed”，如：“stop”→“stopped”； “三少”，以不发音“e”字母结尾的动词，可直接加上“d”,如：“live”→“lived”； “四刚好”,就是直接加上“ed”，如：“work”→“worked”。

11、冠词a, an, the

a，an，the是冠词，就像帽子扣名词；

元音因素要扣an，辅音因素要扣a；

an／a用来泛泛指，the是特指常牢记。

12、冠词用法

（1）、定冠词的用法

特指双熟悉，上文已提及；

世上独一个，序数最高级；

某些专有名，习语及乐器。

以上口诀归纳了用定冠词的7种一般情况，即：

①特指某些人或物②谈话双方都熟悉的人或事③上文已经提到的人或事④世界上独一无二的事物前⑤序数词或形容词最高级前⑥某些专有名词前⑦一些习惯短语（如：in the day等）中和乐器前（如：play the violin / piano）。

（2） 不用冠词的几种情况

下列情况应免冠，代词限定名词前；

专有名词不可数，学科球类三餐饭；

复数名词表泛指，两节星期月份前；

颜色语种和国名，称呼习语及头衔。

以上口诀主要概括了一般应“免冠”的几种情况，即：

①名词前已有作定语用的this、that、some、any、my等限定词。②专有名词和不可数名词前。③表示学科的（如：maths、Chinese、physics）名词前。④球类活动的名词前及三餐总称前。⑤复数名词表示泛指（一类人或事）时。⑥节日、季节、星期、月份前。⑦表示颜色（如：It\'s red / yellow.）、语种（如：speak English/Japanese）和国家的非全称名词（如：We live in China.They come from America.）。⑧在称呼或表示头衔的名词前（如：Doctor Wang）。⑨某些习惯短语中（如：in bed、go to school等）。

13、be 的用法口诀

我用am，你用are，is连着他，她，它；

单数名词用is，复数名词全用are。

变疑问，往前提，句末问号莫丢弃。

变否定，更容易，be后not莫忘记。

疑问否定任你变，句首大写莫迟疑。

14、巧记：只接不定式作宾语的一些常用特殊谓语动词

动词只接不定式，

不能“ 假装”去“管理”（假装pretend ，管理manage）

要想记牢靠自己

一“想”二“希”加“同意”（一“想”即want, 二“希”即hope和wish，加“同意”即agree）

一旦“决定”“意”“承诺”(决定decide, 意味着mean, 承诺promise)

15、巧记：只接动名词做宾语的一些常用特殊动词

下面口诀可完全记忆指接动名词做宾语的特殊动词：

“承认”“介意”“盼”“原谅”admitmindlook forward toexcuse

“考虑”“建议”“准”“延期”consideradvise/suggestallowdelay/postpone

“想要”“跑掉”“坚持”“练”feel /likeescapeinsist on/persist inpractice “放弃”“享受”不“后悔”give up/abandonenjoyregret

“避免”“错过”“禁”“冒险”avoidmiforbidrisk“想象”“完成”被“欣赏”imaginefinishappreciate

17、巧记：接动词不定式做宾语补足语时省略不定式符号“to”的一些常用特殊动词

（1）可以掌握“八字言”来记忆这几个特殊动词

一感feel,二听hear, listen to, 三让have, let, make,四看see, look at, observe, watch

（2）也可用另外一句话来记忆：

让（let）迈克(make)注意(notice)听听（hear, listen to）看看(see, look at),观察（observe）下这块手表(watch)有(have)何感觉(feel)

18、英语中“分数”的表达法巧记

英语分数不费事，“母序子基”四个字。

分子若是大于1，分母则须加-s。

19、巧妙区分long before 和before long

long 在前（long before），“很久前”，

long在后(before long)，“不久后”。

20、巧记：以-o结尾加-es的名词

歌词：两人两菜一火山

助记：“两人”指的是“英雄”和“黑人”— negro：黑人、原来种族主义时期对黑人的的贬义称呼，现在以基本不用了，而是用black表示黑人；hero英雄

“两菜”指的是“土豆”和“番茄”—— tomato西红柿、番茄, potato西红柿

“一火山”指的是“火山”—— volcano火山

21、-f或-fe结尾的名词的复数形式归纳

勇敢的妻子（wife）亲自（oneself）拿刀（knife）把狼（wolf）赶走，救回小牛（calf）半（half）条命（life）,又把躲在架子(shelf)下面树叶（leaf）中的小偷（thief）抓到。

22、before和ago巧记

before“点”之前，ago“段”之后。

before时态不确定，过去时中用ago。

备注：Before用在一个具体的“时间点”之前，表示“在„之前”，如：before 3:00；ago用在一个具体的“时间段之后”，表示“在这个‘时间段’之前”，如：long time ago.23、五种基本句型歌

英语句子万万千，五大句型把线牵。 句型种类为动词，后接什么是关键； 系词后面接表语；vi独身无牵连； vt又可分三类，单宾双宾最常见， 还有宾语补足语；各种搭配记心间。

推荐第6篇：英语语法

2010年1~12月政治时事

1月1日—中华人民共和国担任本年度1月联合国安全理事会轮值主席。

1月1日—本年度第一个天文现象，月偏食，此次称“蓝月”。(下一次将等到2028年) 1月1日—西班牙接任瑞典成为新一届欧洲联盟轮值主席国。

1月1日—世界上最大的自由贸易区中国－东盟自由贸易区正式建成，总人口达十九亿。

1月4日—阿拉伯联合酋长国首都迪拜，地球地表上最高的人造建筑物，高达828米的“哈利法塔”正式开幕启用。

1月5日—台湾通过食品卫生管理法修正案，明文禁止美国牛绞肉、内脏等六项高风险部位进口。

1月5日—北半球因大气循环系统遭到破坏和太阳黑子活动减少以及北极震荡，导致暴雪不断，欧洲大陆几近冰封，温度创新低。

1月5日—沙特阿拉伯宣布拟建造高达1000米的王国塔(Kingdom Tower)，预计2020年完工启用。

1月7日—日本捕鲸船与反捕鲸抗议船只在怒涛中发生碰撞之后，澳大利亚政府今天面临派遣巡逻船到南极海域的压力。这起事件造成一名保育人士受伤。

1月9日—美国加利福尼亚州发生芮氏6.5级地震，造成市政厅损毁。

1月12日—加勒比岛国海地首都太子港发生芮氏7.0级地震，造成海地总统府、医院损坏，当地估计有高达二十万人死亡。

1月15日—日环食。21世纪持续时间最长的日环食。（下一次要等到3043年）

1月16日—立法会经过长达15轮近170多次提问，财务委员会以21比31正式通过对广深港高速铁路香港段拨款申请。这笔款项中，500多亿元为建造工程、118亿元为非建造工程，8600万元为对菜园村居民的补偿。

1月17日—第67届金球奖颁奖典礼在美国贝弗利山希尔顿酒店举行，詹姆斯·卡麦隆执导的影片《阿凡达》获得剧情类最佳影片和最佳导演奖项。

1月19日－日本最大的航空公司日本航空公司正式向东京地方法院申请破产。

足协反赌，南勇、杨一民被抓。

胡锦涛2月24-26来陕西访问。

国家能源委员会成立，温家宝任主任，李克强任副主任

2010年5月1日至10月31日（总共184天）——2010年世界博览会（Expo 2010）是一个筹备中的世界博览会，2010年在中国上海市举行，也是历来首次由中国举办的世界博览会。博览会的主题是“城市，让生活更美好”。主办机构预计吸引世界各地7000万人次参观者前往，总投资达300亿人民币，是世界博览会史上最大规模。

2010年5月12日——中国第二个防灾减灾日，以纪念汶川大地震2周年。

国内部分：

1：1月1日，中国—东盟自由贸易区正式启动。这是世界上人口最多的自由贸易区，是全球第三大自由贸易区，也是由发展中国家组成的最大自由贸易区。

2：1月6日，《国务院关于推进海南国际旅游岛建设发展的若干意见》日前发布，标志着海南国际旅游岛建设正式上升为国家战略。

3：1月10日晚，2010沈阳国际冰雪节暨盛京灯会、关东庙会在沈阳棋盘山开幕。

4：1月11日，2009年度国家科学技术奖励大会在北京人民大会堂隆重举行。

5：1月13日，沈浩先进事迹报告会在北京人民大会堂举行。 6：1月21日，国家统计局局长马建堂在国务院新闻办发布会上宣布，据初步测算，2009年我国国内生产总值335353亿元，按可比价格计算，比上年增长8.7%，增速比上年回落0.9个百分点。

7：1月22日，上海世博会最大的单体工程、世博会“一轴四馆”永久场馆之

一、上海世博会地标性建筑的世博轴工程，正式竣工。

8：1月27日，中国政府网发布的《国务院办公厅关于成立国家能源委员会的通知》说，根据第十一届全国人民代表大会第一次会议审议批准的国务院机构改革方案和《国务院关于议事协调机构设置的通知》精神，为加强能源战略决策和统筹协调，国务院决定成立国家能源委员会。

9：1月28日，全国档案战线的时代楷模、解放军档案馆原馆员刘义权，19时20分在北京病逝，走完了他近60年忠诚而执着、平凡而伟大的人生。 国际部分：

1：1月6日，美国宇航局公开了哈勃望远镜拍摄到的132亿年前的宇宙照片，距离宇宙大爆炸之后仅6亿年，这是迄今为止最早的宇宙照片。

2：1月8日，西班牙和欧盟领导人晚在马德里的皇家剧院举行欧盟轮值主席国交接仪式。

3：1月12日，海地当地时间下午，一场里氏7.3级地震突袭海地，首都太子港受损严重，此次地震震级太高，震中距太子港仅16公里，震源距地表不过10公里，造成重大伤亡。

4：1月14日，东南亚国家联盟（东盟）外长非正式会议、第三次东盟政治安全共同体理事会会议和东盟协调理事会会议在越南岘港举行。

5：1月18日，为期4天的第三届世界未来能源峰会在阿拉伯联合酋长国首都阿布扎比开幕。

6：1月19日，日美两国外长和防长就《日美安全保障条约》修订50周年纪念日发表联合声明说，两国将进一步深化在广泛领域的安保合作。

7：1月21日，英国著名的科学杂志《自然》发表封面文章，介绍中国科学家有关“大熊猫基因组”研究取得的成果，并配有两头嬉戏的中国大熊猫的图片。

8：1月27日晚，为期5天的2010年世界经济论坛年会在瑞士山城达沃斯开幕，全球90多个国家的2500多位来自商业、政治、教育、文化等各界人士济济一堂，着重探讨金融危机之后的全球治理问题，力求提出解决问题的行动方案。

二月

国内部分：

1：2月2日，纪念姬鹏飞同志诞辰100周年座谈会在北京人民大会堂举行。

2：根据《中华人民共和国食品安全法》规定，国务院近日决定设立国务院食品安全委员会。

3：2月12日至13日，在中华民族传统节日春节到来之际，中共中央总书记胡锦涛来到福建省漳州市，亲切看望在这里创业发展的台商，并向广大台湾同胞致以新春的祝福。

4：2月15日晚，申雪/赵宏博在温哥华冬奥会花样滑冰双人滑比赛中夺得金牌，这是中国选手第一次夺得花样滑冰项目的奥运金牌。另一对中国选手庞清/佟健获得银牌。

5：2月19日，社会各界人士怀着悲痛的心情来到北京八宝山革命公墓，送别我国当代著名教育家、首批特级教师、北京第二实验小学原副校长霍懋征。

6：2月25日，中共中央政治局常委、中央书记处书记、国家副主席习近平上午在人民大会堂出席“2010’经济全球化与工会”国际论坛开幕式并致辞。

国际部分：

1：2月7日，哥斯达黎加最高选举法院晚宣布，执政党民族解放党总统候选人劳拉•钦奇利亚在当日举行的总统大选中以46.8%的得票率获胜，击败了反对党公民行动党候选人奥顿•索利斯和自由运动党总统候选人奥托•格瓦拉，成为哥斯达黎加历史上首位女总统。

2： 2月12日，第二十一届冬季奥林匹克运动会开幕式在加拿大温哥华哥伦比亚体育馆举行。

3：2月12日上午，在国际奥委会第122届全会上，中国前短道速滑名将杨扬以89票赞成5票反对的绝对优势当选为国际奥委会委员。

4：2月27日凌晨，智利发生里氏8.8级强烈地震，已至少有122人死亡，遇难人数还在继续上升。 三月

国内部分：

1：3月1日，以“展现时代巾帼风采、讴歌女性光荣使命”为主题的纪念三八国际劳动妇女节100周年专题文艺晚会在京举行。

2：3月2日，中共中央总书记、国家主席、中央军委主席胡锦涛在解放军歌剧院观看反映解放军档案馆原馆员、全国档案战线时代楷模刘义权先进事迹的大型话剧《生命档案》。

3：3月5日上午，第十一届全国人民代表大会第三次会议在人民大会堂开幕。

4：3月5日，是第十一个中国青年志愿者服务日，各级共青团组织围绕迎世博、迎亚运开展青年志愿者行动。

5：3月7日上午，纪念“三八”国际劳动妇女节100周年大会在人民大会堂举行。

6：3月13日，中国人民政治协商会议第十一届全国委员会第三次会议在北京人民大会堂闭幕。

7：3月14日，“打通拦门沙，治理长江口”这个几代仁人志士的梦想今天终于实现，长江口深水航道治理三期工程顺利通过交工验收。

9：3月18日，我国首架大型民用直升机AC313，在江西景德镇首飞成功，该直升机由中航工业集团自主研制。

10：3月19日，上海城市文明志愿服务行动“集结号”全面吹响——为迎接世博会的到来，上海组建了一支由近200万名志愿者组成的城市文明志愿者队伍，人数将近上海总人口数的1/10。

11：3月22日，是第十八届世界水日，也是第二十三届中国水周的第一天。

12：3月28日晚，大型音乐舞蹈史诗《复兴之路》在国家大剧院举行闭幕演出。。 国际部分：

1：3月15日下午，曾担任过安倍内阁法相和麻生内阁总务相的自民党政要鸠山邦夫以希望组建新党为由，向自民党高层提出离党申请。

2：3月20日中午，尼泊尔前首相、尼泊尔大会党主席吉里贾•普拉萨德•柯伊拉腊在加德满都病逝。

3：3月21日晚，在长达近11个小时的辩论和投票之后，美国国会众议院通过了最终版本的医改法案。

4：3月30日，欧洲核子研究中心的大型强子对撞机实施总能量达7万亿电子伏特的质子束流对撞，首次对撞取得成功。 四月

国内部分：

1：4月8日，股指期货启动仪式在上海举行，中共中央政治局委员、上海市委书记俞正声和中国证监会主席尚福林共同启动了股指期货。

2：4月8日，我国首辆高速磁浮国产化样车在成都实现交付。

3：4月11日傍晚，经过3天的高层对话与讨论之后，博鳌亚洲论坛2010年年会完成了全部既定议程，于在海南博鳌落下帷幕。

4：4月13日，核安全峰会在美国首都华盛顿举行，国家主席胡锦涛出席会议并发表重要讲话。

5：4月12日，国家主席胡锦涛在华盛顿会见日本首相鸠山由纪夫，就中日关系和其他共同关心的问题坦诚深入交换意见。

6：4月14日7时49分，青海省玉树藏族自治州玉树县发生7．1级地震，给当地人民群众生命财产造成严重损失。

7：4月22日，国土资源部、辽宁省人民政府、中国地质调查局、中国地质学会以“珍惜地球资源 转变发展方式 倡导低碳生活”为主题在全国各地举办了丰富多彩的活动，隆重纪念第四十一个世界地球日。

8：4月24日上午，国家金融信息大厦在北京市丽泽金融商务区奠基。

9：4月26日，时速250公里的福（州）厦（门）铁路正式开通运营，两地铁路运行时间从原来中转绕行所需的11个小时缩短到目前的1.5个小时。

10：4月26日上午9时，我国内地首条海底隧道、全长8.695公里的厦门翔安隧道正式通车，标志着我国海底隧道自主设计、自行施工的能力跃入世界先进行列。

11：4月28日，国家主席胡锦涛下午在人民大会堂同法国总统萨科齐举行会谈。

12：4月28日，晚第六届中国国际动漫节在浙江杭州开幕。

13：4月30日，晚展示中国发展新貌，荟萃世界文明精华。举世瞩目的中国2010年上海世界博览会开幕式在上海世博文化中心隆重举行， 国际部分：

1：4月8日，国际航空运输协会（简称国际航协）理事长乔瓦尼•比西尼亚尼在北京出席该机构北亚区办公室乔迁庆典时表示，去年底以来，全球航空业状况有所好转，不过全行业仍处于亏损状态。

2：4月15日，“金砖四国”领导人第二次正式会晤在巴西首都巴西利亚举行，中国国家主席胡锦涛、俄罗斯总统梅德韦杰夫、巴西总统卢拉、印度总理辛格出席。

3：4月25日，在华盛顿举行的世界银行发展委员会春季会议通过了发达国家向发展中国家转移投票权的改革方案，在提高发展中国家在世行投票权问题上“迈出历史性一步”。

4：4月29日下午，为期两天的第十六届南亚区域合作联盟（简称南盟）首脑会议在不丹首都廷布落下帷幕。 五月 国内部分

1：5月1日，上午中国2010年上海世界博览会开园仪式在上海世博中心举行。

2：5月5日，国务院召开全国节能减排工作电视电话会议，动员和部署加强节能减排工作。 3：5月5日，国务院总理温家宝主持召开国务院常务会议，审议并通过《国家中长期教育改革和发展规划纲要（2010—2020年）》。

4：5月3日至7日，应中共中央总书记、国家主席胡锦涛的邀请，朝鲜劳动党总书记、国防委员会委员长金正日对中国进行非正式访问，并在北京、天津、辽宁等省市参观考察。 5：5月12日，成都至都江堰的快速铁路——成灌快铁正式开通运营。是全国首条市域城际铁路。

6：5月13日上午，河南省高级人民法院与商丘市中级人民法院联合召开新闻发布会宣布：给予因错案冤枉服刑10多年的赵作海国家赔偿金及生活困难补助费共计65万元。 7：5月14日，第六届中国（深圳）国际文化产业博览交易会在深圳隆重开幕。

8：5月15日，上午以“携手建设创新型国家”为主题的第十届科技活动周开幕式在北京首都博物馆举行。

9：5月15日，中国房山世界地质公园开园，地质公园博物馆迎来首批游客。 国际部分

1：5月2日，第十三届东盟与中日韩（10＋3）财长会在乌兹别克斯坦首都塔什干举行。 2：5月3日，第八次《不扩散核武器条约》缔约国审议大会在纽约联合国总部开幕，来自189个缔约国的代表参加了此次会议，会议主要围绕《不扩散核武器条约》的“三大支柱”，即核不扩散、核裁军及和平利用核能等方面的议题，以大会和小组讨论的形式进行。 3：5月4日，日美两国政府代表在东京首次围绕美军普天间机场搬迁问题举行正式工作磋商。

4：5月6日，第六十四届联合国大会召开特别会议，纪念第二次世界大战结束65周年。 5：5月8日，应俄罗斯总统梅德韦杰夫邀请，国家主席胡锦涛抵达莫斯科，出席俄罗斯纪念卫国战争胜利65周年庆典。

6：5月11日晚，英国保守党和自由民主党（自民党）宣布组成最近70年来首个联合政府，保守党领袖卡梅伦成为1974年以来首个“无多数议会”下联合政府的首相。

7：5月11日晚，英国保守党和自由民主党（自民党）宣布组成最近70年来首个联合政府，保守党领袖卡梅伦成为1974年以来首个“无多数议会”下联合政府的首相。2010年7月-12月重大时政

1、7月10日是“中国2010年上海世博会志愿者主题日”，也是世博历史上首次设立的“志愿者主题日”。

2、国家统计局新闻发言人盛来运7月15日在国新办的新闻发布会上宣布，据初步测算，上半年国内生产总值172840亿元，按可比价格计算，同比增长11.1%，比上年同期加快3.7个百分点。

3、今年是深圳经济特区建立30周年。温家宝强调， 改革开放是决定当代中国命运的关键抉择，是实现国家强盛、人民幸福的必由之路。过去 30多年中国的发展变化，靠的是改革开放，未来要实现中华民族的伟大复兴，仍然要靠改革开放。

4、8月26日，我国第一台自行设计、自主集成研制的“蛟龙号”载人潜水器3000米级海上试验取得成功，最大下潜深度达到3759米，标志着我国继美、法、俄、日之后成为第五个掌握3500米以上大深度载人深潜技术的国家。

5、9月3日是中国人民抗日战争胜利65周年纪念日

6、9月29日，总高达600米的世界第一高的电视观光塔——广州塔落成。

7、2010年上海世界博览会中华人民共和国国家馆日仪式10月1日上午在上海世博中心隆重举行。

8、10月31日晚，2010年上海世界博览会闭幕式在上海世博文化中心隆重举行。上海世博会是继北京奥运会后我国举办的又一国际盛会，也是第一次在发展中国家举办的注册类世界博览会。本届世博会的主题是“城市，让生活更美好”。理念是“理解、沟通、欢聚、合作”。

9、10月1日18时59分57秒， 嫦娥二号卫星成功发射。这标志着探月工程二期任务迈出了成功的第一步。

11月8日，探月工程嫦娥二号月面虹湾局部影像图揭幕仪式上午在北京举行。 影像图的传回，标志着嫦娥二号任务所确定的工程目标全部实现，科学目标也正在陆续实现，探月工程二期嫦娥二号任务取得圆满成功。

中国载人航天工程新闻发言人8月17日表示，我国载人航天工程第一个空间交会对接目标——天宫一号目标飞行器，已于近日完成总装。该飞行器将于2011年发射进入预定轨道，之后，发射神舟八号飞船与之交会对接。

10、郭明义同志先进事迹首场报告会10月11日在北京人民大会堂举行。郭明义同志是助人为乐的道德模范，是新时期学习实践雷锋精神的优秀代表。

此前，香港义工黄福荣在青海玉树地震中舍己救人的义举得到了国家的肯定和表彰。 被授予 “抗震救灾舍己救人杰出义工”称号，

11、10月17日是联合国确定的第十八个“国际消除贫困日”，今年的活动主题为“缩小贫穷与体面工作之间的差距”，

12、第六次全国人口普查工作2010年11月1日在全国展开。我国的人口普查每10年开展一次。

13、11月12，第十六届亚洲运动会在广州隆重开幕， 中国体育代表团取得了199枚金牌、416枚奖牌的优异成绩，连续八届名列亚运会金牌榜首位。

14、亚太经合组织第十八次领导人非正式会议11月13日在日本横滨举行，国家主席胡锦涛出席当天举行的第一阶段会议并发表重要讲话。

15、我国超级计算机跨入世界领先行列：国家超级计算天津中心的“天河一号”以峰值速度4700万亿次、持续速度2566万亿次每秒浮点运算的优异性能位居世界第一，国家超级计算深圳中心的“曙光星云”位居第三。

16、韩国和朝鲜11月23日下午在西部海域存在争议的“北方界线”附近发生交火，半岛局势日趋紧张。

17、12月3日，京沪高铁跑出时速486.1公里，再次刷新世界铁路运营试验最高速。

7月1日上午8时， 我国乃至世界上标准最高、里程最长、运营速度最快的沪宁城际高速铁路正式投入运营

18、12月24日，位于安徽合肥的我国新一代“人造太阳”、世界首个全超导托卡马克（EAST）核聚变实验装置2010年度实验圆满结束，目前已获得1兆安等离子体电流、100秒1500万度偏滤器长脉冲等离子体、大于30倍能量约束时间高约束模式等离子体、3兆瓦离子回旋加热等多项重要实验成果。

19、中国共产党第十七届中央委员会第五次全体会议，于2010年10月15日至18日在北京举行。全会听取和讨论了胡锦涛受中央政治局委托作的工作报告，审议通过了《中共中央关于制定国民经济和社会发展第十二个五年规划的建议》。

20、9月7日 ，中国渔船在钓鱼岛海域被日本海上保安厅巡逻船冲撞。而后又与追踪的另两艘日本巡逻船中的一艘发生碰撞。随后日方扣押了中国籍渔船和船员，9月25日，被日方非法抓扣的中国船长詹其雄乘中国政府包机安全返抵福州。

21、今年，国家大力推进新型农村社会养老保险。

新型农村社会养老保险，称为“新农保”，是继取消农业税、农业直补、新型农村合作医疗等政策之后的又一项重大惠农政策。采取个人缴费、集体补助和政府补贴相结合，其中中央财政将对地方进行补助，并且会直接补贴到农民头上。 从2011年元月起， 年满60周岁、未享受城镇职工基本养老保险待遇的农村居民，不用缴费，可以按月领取基础养老金55元。

推荐第7篇：英语语法

各位领导，各位姐妹：

大家好！在这个春光灿烂的日子里，我们迎来了第101个国际劳

动妇女节，一个专属于我们女性的节日。它体现了社会对女性的关爱，对女性的尊重，对女性的理解。充满了体贴和爱心，带给我们的是自尊自信，乐观向上的精神。在这个特殊的日子里，我要向各位姐妹以及我自己说一声“节日快乐”。

在过去的一年，我们经历了8.12特大洪水灾害，一场百年不遇

的大灾难，它的破坏力和杀伤力对黄渚人民所造成的伤害和损失是难以计量的。但是，在这场灾难面前，我们没有被打倒，而是以坚强乐观的心态抵御灾害，保卫家园。尤其是我们的妇女同胞，更是展现了巾帼不让须眉的风范，她们在精神上和实际行动上都为抗洪救灾做出了巨大贡献，无论家里受灾与否，大家都积极投入到抗洪第一线，不怕苦，不怕累，团结一心，众志成城。这就是我们黄渚的女性同胞，自强不息，永不服输。在此，我要向各位姐妹道一声“大家辛苦了”。

我们作为女性感到骄傲和自豪，在我们的前后，在我们的周围有

这么多伟大的女性。姐妹们，你是否想到要加入这伟大的行列呢？伟大的女性，要付出巨大的牺牲，你是否愿将你的毕生精力投到这伟大的事业中去呢？姐妹们，接下来我们将面临更严峻的考验，因为我们即将要投入到灾后重建的工作中去了。这项工作任重而道远，需要我们的积极参与和大力支持。我相信，大水能冲垮房屋，却冲不垮我们对美好生活的信心，只要我们肯干，一切都会好起来的。

时代在变化，人的观念也要与时俱进，新世纪的宏伟大业，为广

大妇女提供了施展才华的广阔舞台，新时代的广大妇女要进一步树立“自尊、自信、自立、自强”精神，在新形势和新任务面前，坚持解放思想、实事求是，以与时俱进的思想观念和奋发有为的精神状态，勇于创新，开拓进取，在经济和社会发展中大显身手，在实现自身价值的同时创造出无愧于时代的新业绩。

俗话说：根扎的越深，树就长的越高，步踏的越实，路才能走的

越远。我们必须脚踏实地，努力奋斗。时代向我们发出了召唤，十二五的号角已经响起，重建的大旗已经升起，让我们积极行动起来，齐心协力，共创美好明天！

谢谢大家！

推荐第8篇：英语语法

Topic3 Bicycles are popular with people

一、重点词汇：

（一）词形转换：

1.death (动词) die (形容词 )dead 2 slow (副词) slowly

3.croing（动词）cro 介词） acro 4.succe（动词）succeed (形容词succeful

5．Pain (形容词) painful 6.lead (名词) leader

7.final (副词) finally 8impoible (反义词) poible

9 courage （动词） encourage

（二）重点词组:

1．Slow down 减速

2.run into 撞到

3.avoid doing sth 避免 防止做某事

4.warn sb to do sth 警告/提醒某人做某事

5.ride into 进入 跻身于

6 get used to (doing)习惯于做某事

7.a sharp turn 急转弯

8.be popular with 受……的欢迎

9.get a fine 处以罚金

10.go on doing sth 继续做某事

11.the way to succe 成功之路

12.obey the traffic rules 遵守交通规则 13.break the traffic rules 违反交通规则 14.be afraid of doing sth 害怕做某事 15.be famous for 因……闻名

16.be in danger 处于危险中

17.after a while 一会儿

二． 重点句型及重点语言点

1．I think traffic in Beijing is crazy.我认为北京的交通很拥堵。

traffic 是不可数名词

2.If people obey the traffic rules , there will be fewer accidents.如果人们都遵守交通规则，交通事故将会减少。

If we break the traffic rules, it will be dangerous and we will get a fine.如果人们违反交通规则，将很危险，我们会受到处罚的。

这是if 引导条件状语从句，主句用一般将来时，从句用一般现在时。

3．I feel a little more confident.我感到自信多了。

more confident 是比较级

4.It can help us save energy and avoid pollution.这样可以节约能源以及避免空气污染。 avoid sth / doing sth 避免做某事

You should avoid making the mistake like that.

He ran into the wall to avoid hitting the truck.5.Bicycles are popular with people.自行车深受人们欢迎。 Be popular with 受……欢迎 6 It warns us to be more careful.Warn sb (not)to do sth 警告/提醒某人做某

事

He warned her to keep silence.Warn sb about sth 提醒某人某事

7.Most people think bicycles are much safer than any other vehicle.大部分人认为自行车比其他交通工具要安全些。

8．.However, his way to succe didn’t go well.然而，他的成功之路并非一帆风顺。

The way to succe 成功之路 succe in doing sth 在……成功

I didn’t have much succe in finding a job.我找工作没什么结果。

9．Like the other challenges in his life, Lance faced it head-on.像面对生命中其他挑战一样，兰斯迎头面对。

10．It seems impoible to beat him.打败他似乎是不可能的。

beat sb 打败某人 win a game /match/ a gold medal

It seems +adj+to do sth 做某事似乎……

She always seems to be sad.

推荐第9篇：英语语法学习巧记口诀大总结_中考必备

英语语法学习巧记口诀大总结

英语学习

动词为纲“滚雪球”， 难易编组抓循环； 同类归纳印象深 ， 图示介词最直观； 混淆多因形音义 ， 反义词语成对念； 构词方法不可忘 ，习惯用语集中练； 词不离句法最好 ， 课外阅读莫间断； 听说读写一齐上， 持之以恒定乾坤。

（1）记单词，要“五到”，眼嘴手脑齐开炮；读写背默各几遍，印象清晰记得牢。（“五到”记忆法）

（2）记过单词莫靠边，几天之后再看看；似忘非忘又温习，反反复复印心间。（循环记忆法）

（3）单词多了别心烦，分片分组来攻占；五个一组先吃掉，几组连成一大片。（分组记忆法）

（4）结合词组句子记，有情有景有意义；重点段落须背诵，理解深刻有乐趣。（理解记忆法）

（5）要想单词不写错，语音一关还得过；读音规律掌握好，拼写自然少差错。（语音记忆法）

（6）分类归纳便于记，同类词汇放一起；bike，plane和jeep，归到交通工具里。（归纳记忆法）

（7）同义近义反义词，辨析对比来记忆，比较对照才开窍，印象深刻记得牢。（对比记忆法）

（8）单词长了容易忘，卡片纸条来帮忙；mathematics不好记，纸条贴到《数学》上。（卡片记忆法）

（9）构词法，要学习，前缀后缀有规律；转换常把词类变，合成本是二合一。（构词记忆法）

（10）课外读物有情趣，单词复现便于记；只要坚持常阅读，一举几得大有益。（阅读记忆法）

一、

1.数词变化规律及读法口诀

1

两大数词基和序，前表数量后第几。构成先谈基数词，1至12请认真记。

13至19teen结尾齐，ty结尾表示几十。若要表达几十几,几十短横1到9。

One hundred 一百记，若表几百几十几。 几百 and几十几，基数规律上述里。

再把序数谈仔细，第一至三独立记。 第四至十九结尾th,第廿到九十有规律。

基数基础y变ieth。第几十几有特例，第几十由基数起，几用序数有道理。

第一百one hundred。若说第一百几十几。 One hundred and第几十几。谈此即告一段落。

序有缩式莫忘记，上述须用心体味。 2.句子种类口诀

句子按用途分四大体，陈述疑问感叹和祈使。陈述用来叙述一件事。疑问主要用来提问题。

祈使表达命令和请求。表达强烈感情感叹句。上述九是句种之定义。祈使主语you被抛弃。

若将其变成否定形式，动词之前加don’t是正理。 3.陈述句变感叹句口诀

英语陈述变感叹两句套。What 或How加其他成分表。What [a(an)]形加名用的妙。 剩余照写句末用感叹号。 How 后副和形是正确道，其后照写感叹号堪称妙。

2

5.变动词单三人称口诀

一般情况动词尾-s加。O,s,ch,sh结尾“-es”没有差。 辅音加y 去y为“-ies”是方法。 6.现在进行时及句型转换口诀

现在正在进行之动作，用现在进行时来掌舵。构成be加现在分词妥，be的用法如同系动词。

切记be是助动词没错，be后面加not 7.现在分词构成口诀

词尾直加-ing是一般式，若遇无音e去之加-ing。 重读闭音一辅音字母尾，双写该字母-ing是正里。 8.形容词和副词比较级和最高级构成口诀

结尾直加-er,-est属一般，详细构成方法逐一来侃谈。 一辅音结尾重读闭音节看，辅音双写-er,-est是习惯。 辅音加y(ly)除外有型感，按照去y,-er,-iest方法办。 上述皆属单音部分双音段，下面把多音节规律来看看。 词前加more,most此规律唤。规则变化到此已全都谈完。 有些不规则变化请你记全。“双好”better,best记的宽。

3

“坏病”worse,worst莫记乱。“双多” more,most不用管

“老、远”两种形式别记篡，“有点”le,least记清盼。 9.感观使役动词记忆和使用口诀

1.记忆口诀：二听四看一感觉，使役动词有三个。或：一感二听三使四看。

一感；feel 二听：hear,listen to 三使：make ,let ,have

四看：look at,see,watch,notice 使用口诀：感使动词真奇怪，to在句中象妖怪。

主动句里它走开，被动句里它回来。

动词let要除外，to词可来可不来。

二、

be 的用法口诀

我用am，你用are，is连着他，她，它； 单数名词用is，复数名词全用are.变疑问，往前提，句末问号莫丢弃。 变否定，更容易，be后not莫忘记。 疑问否定任你变，句首大写莫迟疑。 时间名词前所用介词的速记歌

4

年月周前要用in，日子前面却不行。 遇到几号要用on，上午下午又是in.要说某日上下午，用on换in才能行。 午夜黄昏须用at，黎明用它也不错。 at也用在明分前，说“差”可要用上to， 说“过”只可使用past，多说多练牢牢记， 莫让岁月空蹉跎。

记住f（e）结尾的名词复数 妻子持刀去宰狼，小偷吓得发了慌； 躲在架后保己命，半片树叶遮目光。 巧记48个国际音标

单元音共十二，四二六前中后。 双元音也好背，合口集中八个整。 辅音共计二十八，八对一清又七浊， 四个连对也包括。有气无声清辅音， 有声无气浊辅音，发音特点应掌握。 非谓语动词的一些特殊用法：

后只接不定式作宾语的一些常用特殊谓语动词 动词后，不定式，want，hope和wish， agree，decide，mean，manage，promise， expect，pretend，且说两位算在此， 要记牢，要记住，掌握它们靠自己。

后接动词不定式做宾语补足语，省略不定式符号“to”的一些常用特殊动词 一些动词要掌握，have，let和make，

5

此三动词是使役，“注意”“观察”“听到”see， 还有feel和watch，使用它们要仔细， 后接“宾补”略去“to”，此点千万要牢记 除此之外，还可以掌握“八字言”

一感feel，二听hear，listen to，三让have，let，make，四看see，look at，observe，watch 后只接动名词做宾语的一些常用特殊动词 特殊动词接“动名”，使用它们要记清， “放弃”“享受”可“后悔”， “坚持”“练习”必“完成”， “延期”“避免”非“介意” 掌握它们今必行。

动名词在句中的功能及其它

“动名”语法其功能，名词特征有动、形，主宾表定都可作，“动名”、“现分”要认清，“现分”不作“宾”和“主”，

动名作“状”可不行。二词皆可作定语，混为一谈不允许，主谓关系视分词，“动名”一词无此义。

现在分词形式及在句子中的作用（包括过去分词的作用）：

现在分词真好记，动词后面ING.它的作用真不小，可以充当定状表。 还有宾语补足语，忘记此项不可以。 分词做定语的位置及其它

“定分”位置有二条，词前词后定分晓。 单个分词在词前，有时此规有颠倒。 分词短语在词后，“定从”和它互对照。 “现分”动作进行时，“过分”动作完成了。

6

（注：“定分”：做定语的分词：“定从”：定语从句：“现分”：现在分词：“过分”：过去分词。）

分词做状语在句子中所表示的意义 分词做状语，概有七意义。

“时间”和“原因”，“结果”与“目的”。 “方式”加“伴随”，“条件”常出席。 且谈其主语，谓语头前的*.欲要记住它，必须常练习。（*指句子的主语） 英语分数巧记

英语分数不费事，“母序子基”四个字。 分子若是大于一，分母还须加-s.字母“oo”读音歌

“oo”发[u：]最常见，非重音中要短念。 字母“k”前不能长，“好脚站木羊毛”短。 “血”与“水灾”真特殊，“oo”读[Λ]细分辨。 “oo”加“r”读作[ ]，“poor”读[ ]好可怜。 注：“好脚站木”即：good，foot，stood，wood 第二句也可以是：“d、k之前oo短，”foot“、”food“恰相反。

1.长音：bloom，boot，cool，foot，moon，root，school，soon，too，troop，room，zoo 2.弱读短：claroom，schoolroom，workroom，bedroom，boyhood 3.k前短：book，brook，cook，look，shook，took 4.[ ]：door，floor 在某些表示请求、命令、建议等动词后面的宾语从句中，谓语动词要用动词原形或should+动词原形。

7

I—insist， d—denand， r—request/require/recommend， o—order， p—propose， c—command， a—advise， p—preqersic， s—suggest.巧记英文信封的写法

A.可以记住汉字“尖”字，先写小地名，再写大地名。

B.将竖式汉文写法的信封，按顺时针方向旋至水平位置。这样，地址的排列顺序恰巧是英文信封的书写格式。 巧记家庭成员

爹father 娘mother 哥哥弟弟brother 姐姐妹妹sister.long before 和before long long 在前（long before），“很久前”， long在后（before long），“不久后”。巧记lie和lay

躺 lie，lay，lain，lie in bed again； 撒谎 lie，lied，lied，don‘t be a liar； 产蛋 lay，laid，laid，a hen laid an egg； 放置 A loy picked it up，and laid it in the bag.开、闭音节歌

开音节，音节开， 一元字母在后排； 不怕一辅堵后门， 还有哑e在门外。 （拍手念）a，e，o，u，I 就读a，e，o，u，i 闭音节，音节闭，

一元字母生闷气； 辅音字母堵后门，

一元字母音短急。

（拍手念）a，e，o，u，i

some 与 time

分开“一段时间”， some time表示“一段时间”；

相聚“在某一时”，sometime表示“在某一时”；

“有时”相聚加s，sometimes表示“有时，不时”；

“几次”分开带s，some times表示“几次，次数”。

直接引语

直引若是一般问，变间ifwhether连。语序变为陈述式，时态人称相应变。

直引若是特殊问，疑问词连接记心间。其余问题挺简单，一切只当一般问。

直引若是祈使句，谓语动词挺要紧。 told asked ordered，根据口气来选定。

告诉人、请人、命令人，后跟to do sth.。 若是否定祈使句，not to do后边行。

口诀1

只能接-ing分词作宾语的动词：

建议冒险去献身，忍受期待不停顿；

放弃延期悔失去，坚持欣赏实践成；

注意原谅避反对，考虑要求不自禁；

允许习惯不介意，价值开始想动名。

如：建议：advise，suggest，冒险：risk，献身：devote oneself to 口诀2 介词用法口诀

早、午、晚要用in，at黎明、午夜、点与分。

年、月、年月、季节、周，阳光、灯、影、衣、冒in. 将来时态in„„以后，小处at大处in. 有形with无形by，语言、单位、材料in. 特征、方面与方式，心情成语惯用in.

9

介词at和to表方向，攻击、位置、恶、善分。

日子、日期、年月日，星期加上早、午、晚，

收音、农场、值日on，关于、基础、靠、著论。

着、罢、出售、偷、公、假，故意、支付、相反，准。

特定时日和“一„„就”，on后常接动名词。

年、月、日加早、午、晚，of之前on代in. 步行、驴、马、玩笑on，cab，carriage则用in. at山脚、门口、在当前，速、温、日落、价、核心。

工具、和、同随with，具有、独立、就、原因。

就„„来说宾译主，对、有、方状、表细分。

海、陆、空、车、偶、被by，单数、人类know to man. this、that、tomorrow，yesterday，next、last、one. 接年、月、季、

口诀3 定冠词用法小结口诀

a.口诀

1.有水无湖：海、洋、海湾、河等，都用the；单个湖不用the，（但多个湖用the）；

the Red Sea，the Pacific Ocean，the Persian Gulf， the Yangtze River The Great Lakes（五大湖）；Lake Erie（伊利湖）

2.有球无星：地球，月亮用the；行星不用the： Mars， Venus；

3.有山无峰：The Huangshan Mountains（黄山）；Mount Everest（珠穆朗玛峰）；

Mount（or Mt.） Tai（泰山）。

4.有独无欧（偶）：独一无二的，the earth， he moon， the sun用the；

10

欧洲等七大洲不用the.

Europe， Africa， Asia， North America， South America， Antarctica， Oceania 5.有（足）族无球（运动）：种族用the： the Indians（印第安人）；球类运动

baseball， basketball 6.有文无章：历史性的文件用the；小说等的章节不用the The Constitution（宪法）； chapter one 7.学而不专：学校放在词组的前面时用the；专有名词放在词组的前面时不用the；

The University of Fudan； Fudan University 口诀4 倒装口诀

副词开头要例装，人称代词则如常。

only修饰副介状，位于句首半倒装。

否定意义副连词，“既不„也不”须倒装。

表语前置主语长，衔接自然常倒装。

such代词做表语，引起主谓要倒装。

Not only开头句，前一分句须倒装。

had，were，should虚拟句，省略if半倒装。

口诀5 省略口诀

回答问题要简洁，并列重复须省略。

祁使主语必省略，比较than后须省略。

宾从表从that省略，主从that勿省略。

前后出现同一词，惯用习语常省略。

口诀6

lie lay lain躺／lay laid laid放下；产蛋／lie lied lied撒谎，这几个词在拼写上很

11

容易混淆，有人编了这样的口诀：规则的“撒谎”，不规则的“躺”，“躺”过就“下蛋”，“下蛋”不规则。“规则”指规则变化，“不规则”即不规则变化，如lie作“撒谎”解时，是规则变化，即其过去式和过去分词直接加-d：“躺过”的“过”指的是过去式，即lie的过去式lay是“下蛋”的原形：“下蛋”是不规则变化。

口诀7

一般是在基数词后加上－th构成，但应记住一些特殊变化，口诀如下：

基变序，有规律，词尾要加－th，

一、

二、三，个别记，

词尾分别为t，d，d；八去t， 九去e， ve要用f替；

ty变y为i，th前面有个e. 例如：

one-first two-second three-third four-fourth five-fifth

eight-eighth nine-ninth twelve-twelfth twenty-twentieth

口诀8 独立主格结构

独立结构要认清：名、代之后副或形。 或是分词或“介短”，with结构不可轻， 名代二词是其“主”，句子结构必分明。 独立结构好掌握，句中作用只一个： 千变万化皆做“状”，其中意义也不多。

“时间”“条件”和“原因”，“方式”“伴随”没别的。 “状从”和其前三个，可以互变不难学。

口诀9

口语中有些动词跟不定式作宾语补足语时省去了to，其中诀是：一感二听三让四观看。

一感：feel

12

二听：hear、listen to

三让：let、have、make

四观看：observe、see、watch、look at

口诀10

感官动词和使役动词后面出现了动词不定式做宾语补足语时，主动结构中必须省略不定式符号to，但在变为被动结构时，省略的to 则必须加上。

口诀：十大动词真奇怪，to 来to 去令人猜；主动语态to 离开，被动语态to 回来。（十大动词一般指：一感feel，二听listen to， hear，三让let，make，have，四看look at， see，notice，watch ，都是感官动词或使役动词。）

口诀11

分开“一段时间”， some time表示“一段时间”；

相聚“在某一时”，sometime表示“在某一时”；

“有时”相聚加s，sometimes表示“有时，不时”；

“几次”分开带s，some times表示“几次，次数”。

口诀12

直引若是一般问，变间ifwhether连。语序变为陈述式，时态人称相应变。

直引若是特殊问，疑问词连接记心间。其余问题挺简单，一切只当一般问。

直引若是祈使句，谓语动词挺要紧。 toldaskedordered，根据口气来选定。告诉人、请人、命令人，后跟to do sth.。若是否定祈使句，not to do后边行。

口诀13

die of，die of，饥老病冷毒。

君可见die by，弱伤劳过度。

忧愁兼羞耻，with加愤怒，

浮生真若梦，一刀便成空。

（注：“浮若梦”即from：“一刀便成空”指死于意外。

13

口诀14 名词变复数

一个有信仰的海湾首领叫农奴到屋顶拿手帕。（belief，gulf，chief，serf，roof，handkerchief后接s）

工作间里有架钢琴，钢琴上有台收音机，收音机旁有幅照片，照片里有动物园，动物园里有竹子。（studio，piano，radio，photo，zoo，bamboo后接s）

口诀15 名词变复数

其实，以o结尾的名词单数变复数的规则至为简单，用不到什么口诀，只需记住一句话：

有生命的加-es，无生命的加-s.

（火山有死活之分，故volcano的复数形式为 volcanoes.）

口诀16

非谓语动词的一些特殊用法 后只接不定式作宾语的一些常用特殊谓语动词

动词后，不定式，want， hope和wish，

agree， decide， mean， manage， promise，

expect， pretend，且说两位算在此，

要记牢，要记住，掌握它们靠自己。

口诀17

后接动词不定式做宾语补足语省略不定式符号“to”的一些常用特殊动词

一些动词要掌握，have， let和make，

此三动词是使役，“注意”“观察”“听到”see，

还有feel和watch，使用它们要仔细，

后接“宾补”略去“to”，此点千万要牢记

除此之外，还可以掌握“八字言”，

一感feel，二听hear， listen to， 三让have， let， make，四看see， look at， observe， watch

14

口诀18

后只接动名词做宾语的一些常用特殊动词

特殊动词接“动名”，使用它们要记清，

“放弃”“享受”可“后悔”，

“坚持”“练习”必“完成”，

“延期”“避免”非“介意”

掌握它们今必行。

口诀19 五种基本句型歌

英语句子万万千，五大句型把线牵。

句型种类为动词，后接什么是关键；

系词后面接表语；vi独身无牵连；

vt又可分三类，单宾双宾最常见，

还有宾语补足语；各种搭配记心间。

五种基本句型：

1.主语+系动词+表语

2.主语+不及物动词

3.主语+及物动词+宾语

4.主语+及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语

5.主语+及物动词+宾语1+宾语2

口诀20

before和ago巧记

before带在点之前，ago总在段之后。

时态不确定，过去时中用ago

before

推荐第10篇：高一英语语法

一。动词 ：

1.现在进行时表将来时间

2.被动语态 （1一般将来时的被动语态的构成，2现在完成时的，3现在进行时的）

二: 直接引语和间接引语：

1.陈述句 （1人称的变化，2时态的变化，3指示代词、时间状语、地点状语和动词的变化)

2.疑问句

3.祈使句

三: 定语从句：

1.由关系代词引导的定语从句

2.由关系副词引导

3.限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句

高一(下)语法项目:

一: 情态动词（1 can;could 2 may;might 3.must;have to 4 shall;should 5will;would 6 ought 7.had better)

二：动词-ing形式

三: 主语和谓语一致

四：it的用法 （1 用作人称代词 2 非人称代词 3 作形式主语或形式宾语 4 用于强调句中）

五：构词法 （1.合成 2.转换 3.派生）

第11篇：小学英语语法

小学英语语法大全.txt你出生的时候，你哭着，周围的人笑着；你逝去的时候，你笑着，而周围的人在哭！喜欢某些人需要一小时,爱上某些人只需要一天,而忘记一个人得用一生小学英语语法大全 第一章 名 词

一、定义

名词是表示人或事物名称的词。它既可以表示具体的东西，也可以是表示抽象的东西。

二、分类

1.名词可以根据意义分为普通名词和专有名词 如：john is a student student是普通名词，john是专有名词

普通名词前可以用不定冠词a/an, 定冠词the 或不加冠词，专有名词前一般不加冠词，专有名词的首字母要大写。

2.普通名词又可以分为个体名词、集体名词、物质名词和抽象名词，其中个体名词与集体名词是可数名词，物质名词和抽象名称是不可数名词。

3.专有名词

专有名词是表示人名、地名、团体、机构、组织等的专有名词，多为独一无二的事物。

三、名词的数

1、名词分为可数名词和不可数名词。

可数名词--可以数的名词

不可数名词--数不清（没有复数）

drink?milk tea water orange juice coke coffee porridge food?rice bread meat fish fruit cake dumplings

2、可数名词与不定冠词a(an)连用有数数形式，不可数名词不能与不定冠词a(an)连用，没有复数形式

many+可数名词复数

much/a little+不可数名词

some, any , a lot of (lots of) 两者都可以修饰。

3、可数名词可以直接用数词来修饰 不可数名词 数词 +量词 +of + 名词 对可数名词的数量提问用how many 对不可数名词的数量提问用 how much

4、不可数名词的量有以下两种表示方法：

1） some, much ,a little ,a lot of ,a bit of , plenty of 用等表示多少。 注意既可以与可数名词复数，又可以与不可数名词连用的有：plenty of ,some ,a lot of ,lots of ,most of 等。

如there is much water in the bottle .瓶中有很多水。 i\'ll tell you much good news.我要告诉你许多好消息。

we should collect some useful information我们应该收集一些有用的消息。 2） 用单位词表示。

用a ...of 表示。

如 a cup of （ 一杯......），a bottle of （一瓶......）

a piece of （ 一张......），a pair of shoes（一双鞋） 如two cups of tea（两杯茶）,five pieces of paper（五张纸）

注意单位词后的动词单复数形式往往取决于单位词的单复数形式；千、百等数词与名词加用，表示复数时，数词仍保持单数，名词变复数。 如two hundred students（200名学生）

ten thousand trees（10000棵树）

测试点he caught a lot of fish他抓到了许多鱼（此处为许多条鱼，fish的复数仍为fish或fishes）

=he caught a lot of fishes.the paper is about some fresh-water fishes.这篇论文是有关几种淡水鱼的。（此处fish表示不同种类的鱼，加复数词尾-es）

5、可数名词分为单数和复数。

名词单数就是该词本身，在其前面加a或an。 1）单数

如a desk（一张桌子）

an old desk（一张旧书桌）

2）复数：要表示一个以上概念时，要用名词复数形式 规则变化

1）一般情况下加-s

如book--books（书） desk--desks（书桌） 2）以s ,x ,ch , sh结尾加-es 如box--boxes（盒子） bus--buses(公共汽车) 注意①以 th 结尾加-s, month--months ②stomach--stomachs 3)以辅音字母+结尾，变y为i再加- es。

如city--cities(城市) country--countries(国家) 注意以元音+y，直接加s。如：day--days(天)，boy--boys(男孩) 4)以f或fe结尾，复数变f或 fe 为v再加-es 如knife-knives(书) , half-halves(一半) (thief ,wife ,life ,shelf ,knife ,leaf ,self ,half ,wolf) 注意①有少数词后直接加s，如roof-roofs (屋顶) 5)以o结尾

(1)辅音字母加o结尾名词的加-es 如tomato-tomatoes(西红杮) potato-potatoes(土豆) (2) 元音字母加o结尾名词的加-s 如piano-pianos (钢琴), zoo-zoos(动物园) photo-photos (照片), kangaroo-kangaroos(袋鼠) kilo-kilos(千克) 注意zero 两种方式都可：zero-zeros或 zeroes(零) 不规则变化

1) 元音字母发变化。

如man--men(男人) ， woman--women(妇女) tooth--teeth(牙齿) ， foot--feet(脚) mouse--mice(老鼠) ， policeman--policemen(警察) policewoman--policewomen(女警察) 2) 词尾发生变化。

如child--children(小孩) ， ox--oxen(公牛) 3) 单、复数形式相同。

如fish--fish(鱼) ，sheep--sheep(绵羊) ，deer--deer(鹿) ，chinese--chinese(中国人) ，yuan--yuan(元) ，jinn--jinn(斤) 注意 不说an english，要说an englishman.①fish作鱼肉讲时不可数，没有复数。 ②fishes指各种不同种类鱼或指几条鱼。 4) 形似单数，实为复数意义。 如people(人，人们)these people (不说a people，可说a person) police(公安，警察)ten police (不说a police，可说a policeman) 5) 由man和woman构成的合成名词，变复数将名词及man或woman都变成复数。 如a man driver-men drivers(男司机) a woman doctor-women doctors (女医生) 6) 合成名词变为复数时，通常只将里面所含的主体名词变为复数。 如paer-by-paers-by(过路人) bus driver-bus drivers(汽车司机) 注意如果没有主体名词，就在最后一词上加-s。如： grown-up-grown-ups(成年人) letter-box-letter-boxes (信箱) 注意①hair和fruit通常作单数，表示总体。若表示若干根头发或若干种水果，则需用这两个词的复数形式。

如would you like some more fruit? 你要不要再吃点水果？

we bought a lot of fruit from the market.我们从市场上买了许多水果， china has some good frits.中国有一些好的水果。(指种类) she has a few white hairs.她有几要白头发。

his black hair is going white.他的黑发逐渐变成灰白色。

注意②wind ,snow和rain这类词，有时也可以有复数形式，表示多次的风、雪或雨。 注意以boy 和girl开头的复合名词变成复数时，一般只把后一名词变成复数。 如 boy student-boy students(男学生) girlfriend--girlfriends(女朋友) 7) 有些名词只有作复数。

如sciors(剪刀)a pair of sciors(一把剪刀)trousers(裤子)shorts(短裤)jeans(工装裤)compaes(两脚规)scales(天平)sunglaes(太阳镜)surroundings(环境)savings(储蓄)writings(作品) 名词+man(woman)构成的复合名词，其复数形式通常与简单名词一样，即把man(woman)改成men(women)。

如englishman--englishmen(英国人) frenchwoman--frenchwomen(法国妇女) 注意german不是复合词，它的复数是germans。

四、名词的所有格

有些名词的可以加来表示所有关系，带这种词尾的名词的形式称为该名词的所有格。 如mary\'s father(玛丽的父亲) jim\'s mother(吉姆的母亲) 与所有格相对来看，不带这种词尾的形式就称为普通格。 1.名词所有格的构成法

1)单数名词词尾加\'s复数名词词尾如没有s，也要加\'s。 如tom\'s knife(汤姆的小刀) children\'s books(儿童书籍) 2)表示几个人共有一样东西，只需在最后一个人名字后加，如果表示各自所有，则需在各个名字后加。

如jim and mike\'s room吉姆和麦克(共用)的房间 jim\'s and mike\'s rooms吉姆和麦克(各自)的房间 3)若名词已有复数词尾-s，只加\"\'\"即可。

如the students\' reading-room(学生阅览室) everyone needs to have at least eight hours\' sleep a night.每个人每晚需要至少8小时的睡眠。(新目标英语九年级) 注意①所有格的读音和名词复数的读音一样。

②名词所有格主要用于表示有生命东西(特别是人或高级动物)的名词。 如this is a woman\'s work.这是女人干的工作。

this is a girls\' school.这是一所女子学校。

4)以-s结尾的专有名词，构成所有格仍然加\'s，或只加\'，但读音都是/iz/。 如 mr jones\'s(mr jones\')book(琼斯先生的书) keats\' works(济慈的作品) (1)表示时间和距离的名词。

如where is today\'s newspaper? 今天的报纸在哪儿？ an hour\'s walk isn\'t far.一小时的路程不远。

(1) 有些无生命东西的名词，如国家，城市季节，太阳，月亮，大地，江河，海洋，船等名词也可用\'s，表示所有关系。 如china\'s population(中国人口) the city\'s life(城市生活) 注意在表示店铺或某人家时，为避免重复(因前面已提到)，名词所有格后面可省略它所修饰的名词。

my uncle\'s(我叔叔家) ,the doctor\'s(医生的诊所) 2.短语所有格

有生命的名词，我们用\'s结构来表示所有关系，如果是无生命的，我们就要用\"名词+of+名词\"的结构来表示。

the window of the house(这间房子的窗户) 注意当\'s所有格用来表示事物类别或属性时不可用of所有格。如：男式鞋应是men\'s，而不是shoes of men。

3.of +名词所有格

of +名词所有称为双重所有格，使用时要注意以下几项。

1)表示部分时，前面的词一定要有a ,an ,some ,any ,few ,two ,no ,several (几个)之类有修饰语，不能是one和the 。

如可说：a book of my brother\'s 我兄弟的一本书

不说：books of my brother\'s或 book of my brother\'s .2)当带有感情色彩时，可用the ,this ,that ,these ,those于名词前。 如the pretty daughter of your sister\'s 你姐姐的漂亮的女儿 did you read that book of lu xun\'s ? 你读过鲁迅的那本书吗？ 3)of 前面的名词不能是专有名词。 如不说：this is john of his uncle\'s. 4)of 后面的名词必须是特定的。

如these books of my friend\'s are good 我朋友的这些书很好。 5)of 后面的名词必须是指人的名词。 比较不说it is a leaf of the tree\'s.a picture of my father指的是爸爸本人的照片。

注意of 所有格和双重所有格有时可以交替使用，意义无甚区别。 如a friend of my brother→a friend of my brother\'s 测试点a car of betty\'s cars ,不可换为a car of betty.。jim\'s and tom\'s fathers are in the same office now.吉姆的父亲的汤姆父亲目前在同一办公室。 常用口诀

表示民族的名词顺口溜

（1）\"中、日、瑞\"友好是一致。 （2）\"英、法\"联盟a变e。

（3）其他一律加s 即chinese，japanese单复数同形；englishman，frenchman的复数为englishmen，frenchmen；其他像german，american，australian等的复数形式是在后面加\"s\"。

o结尾的名词顺口溜

1）有生命的以o结尾的名词变复数时，词尾加es，凡无生命的以o结尾的名词变复数时，词尾加s。

有生命：potato-potatoes, tomato-tomatoes, hero-heroes, negro--negroes 如无生命：zoo-zoos, radio-radios, photo-photos, piano-pianos, zero-zeros, bamboo（竹竿）--bamboos, tobacco（烟丝）--tobaccos1）

2）两人两菜一火山。（+es）

小学-中学课本中以o结尾的名词构成复数时，加es的只有negro（黑人），hero（英雄），potato（土豆），tomato（西红杮），volcano（火山），这就是\"两人两菜一火山\"。

或：黑人和英雄吃土豆和西红柿egroes and heroes eat tomatoes and potatoes） 2）其余以o结尾的名词变复数时均加s。

图景：你在\"zoo\"里，看见一要\"bamboo\"，上面挂着一张\"photo\"，所照的是一架\"piano\"，上面放着一台\"radio\"。

zoo-zoos , bamboo-bamboos,photo-photos piano-pianos, radio-radios.

f、fe结尾的顺口溜

（1）以f(e)结尾的名词变为复数时，有的把f(e)改为v(e)再加s，其他的以\"f(e)\"结尾的名词则直接加\"s\"。

妻子持刀去宰狼，小偷吓得发了慌；

躲在架后保己命，半片树叶遮目光。 wife（妻子），knife（刀子），wolf（狼）thief（小偷），shelf（架子），life（生命）leaf（树叶），self（自己），half（一半），这9个名词变复数时，都要改\"f(e)\"为\"ve\"再加\"s\"。

(2)以f结尾的名词，一般把把f改为ves，但也有特殊情况是直接加-s的， 如gulf, roof, chief, serf, belief, proof, handkerchief。编成口诀联想：

海湾边、屋顶上，首领农仆相望；

谁说他们无信仰，语气定在手帕上

巧记不规则名词单变复

男女脚步牙鹅，老鼠加虱婆。

man-men; woman-women; foot-feet; tooth-teeth; goose-geese; mouse-mice; louse-lice.第二章 冠 词

一、定义

冠词是一种虚词，本身不能单独使用，也没有词义，它用在名词的前面(相当于名词的帽子)，帮助指明名词的含义。

二、分类

共3类：定冠词（the definite article），不定冠词（the indefinite article）、零冠词（zero article）。

三、用法

1、定冠词的用法

a、an与数词one 同源，是\"一个\"的意思。a用于辅音音素前，而an则用于元音音素前。 (1) 表示某一类人或某事物中的任何一个,经常用在第一次提到某人或某物时,用不定冠词起介绍作用，表示一个。

i gave him a book yesterday .我昨天给了他一本书

i am reading an interesting story .我在读一则有趣的故事。 (2) 表示人或事物的某一种类, 强调整体, 即以其中的一个代表一类。 a horse is useful to mankind.马对人类有用。

(3) 不定冠词用在事物的\"单位\"前,如时间, 速度, 价格等意义的名词之前,表示 \"每一\"。 we often go to school two times a day.我们常常一天两次去学校。 i went to the library once a week at least.(4) 不定冠词用来指某人某物,但不具体说明任何人或任何物。 a boy came to see you a moment ago.刚才有一个小孩来找你。 (5)在序数词前表示\"又一;再一\"时。如: i want to read the story a second time 我想再读一遍这篇小说 。 (6) 表示不特定的\"某一个\"时。如: a mr.smith is calling on the phone.有一位史密斯先生来电话找你 。 （7）在特定的短语里表示特定的含义，与不可数名词连用，如： have a good time 过得高兴 (8) 一日三餐前有修饰语时。如: -mum, what shall we have for lunch? -jiaozi.-oh, what a wonderful lunch! i enjoy it very much.(9) 在形容词最高级前表示\"非常\"时。如: leon nine is a most difficult leon, but it isn\'t the most difficult one.(10)不定冠词用于某些词组中。

a little / a few / a lot / a type of / a pile / a great many / many a / as a rule / in a hurry / in a minute / in a word / in a short while / after a while / have a cold / have a try / keep an eye on / all of a sudden

2.定冠词的用法

定冠词the与指示代词this,that,these,those同源，有\"那（这）个\" \"这（那）些\"的意思，但较弱，可以和一个名词连用，来表示某个或某些特定的人或东西。以下为必须加定冠词的情形: (1)在表示双方都明白的人或物的名词之前： take the medicine.把药吃了。

(2)在上文提到过的人或事的名称之前：

he bought a house.i\'ve been to the house. 他买了幢房子。我去过那幢房子。

(3)在指世上独一无二的事物的名词之前：

the sun， the sky， the moon， the earth (4)与单数名词连用表示一类事物，如：

the fox is cunning .狐狸是狡猾的。

(5)与形容词或分词连用，表示一类人：the rich 富人; the living 生者。 (6)用在序数词和形容词最高级，及形容词only， very， same等前面：

where do you live? i live on the second floor. 你住在哪？我住在二层。

that\'s the very thing that ineed 那正是我需要的东西。

(7)在表示\"...世纪...年代\"的结构之前

he began to learn ruian in the 1950s.他在20实际50年代开始学俄语 。 但注意:in one\'s 50s意为\"在某人五十多岁时\"。如: he looked quite healthy though he was in his 80s.(8)在比较级的两种句型中: ①表示\"越 ......,就越......\"时。如: the lighter, the better.越轻越好 。

② 表示\"两者中比较......\"时,用定冠词。如: there are two books on the table.i like the thicker one.(9)用在\"动词+sb.+介词+the+身体部位名称\"的结构中(注意:介词常用in/on/by)。如: the ball hit me on the back.球打中了他的头 。

(10) 在表示\"计量单位\"的可数名词前(注意:介词用by)。如: the workers are paid by the hour/day/month.按月付给工人工资 .(11)用在某些由普通名词构成的专有名词前：the great wall(长城)，the people\'s park(人民公园)等。

the people\'s republic of china 中华人民共和国 the united states 美国

(12)用在表示乐器的名词之前：

she plays the piano.她会弹钢琴.the little girl likes to play the violin.小女孩喜欢拉小提琴。

（13）定冠词用在文艺活动,运动场所的名称前。

they are going to the cinema tonight.他们今晚要去影院看电影。

(14)用在姓氏的复数名词之前，表示一家人：

the greens 格林一家人 (或格林夫妇) (15)在方位名词之前 ，如：in the west on the west (16)在某些短语中 in the day, in the morning (afternoon，evening), the day after tomorrow ,the day before yesterday, the next morning, in the sky (water，field，country) in the dark, in the rain, in the distance, in the middle (of), in the end, on the whole, by the way, go to the theatre

3、零冠词（不用定冠词) (1) 在物质名词前，如：

water is very important .水是非常重要的 。 (2) 在抽象名词前，如：

failure is the mother of succe.失败乃成功之母。 (3) 复数名词表示人或物的种类时，如： doctors cure patients.医生治病救人 .those people are teachers, not students.这些人是老师,不是学生 .(4) 在有关游戏的名词前，如：

do you like to play che? 你喜欢下棋吗 ? (5) 在\"by + 交通工具\"的短语里，如：

shall we walk or go by bus? 我们乘车还是步行 ? (6) 在国名，人名和地名前通常不用定冠词，如 ：

england，mary；

（7）在年份、季节、月份、节日、假日、日期、星期等表示时间的名词之前，不加冠词；

we go to school from monday to friday. 我们从星期一到星期五都上课。 (8)在称呼或表示官衔，职位的名词前不加冠词；

the guards took the american to general lee.

士兵们把这个美国人送到李将军那里。 (9)在三餐、球类运动的名称前，不加冠词 。如： have breakfast，play che (10) 在某些固定词组中，是否有冠词，意义不同。如：

in hospital住院，in the hospital在医院里 in bed在卧床 ，in the bed在床上 in front of在......（外）前面，in the front of 在......（内）前部

go to hospital 去医院看病 go to the hospital 去医院 (并不是去看病，而是有其他目的) 口 诀

泛指用a/ an，单数可数；特指用the，不特不the。

释：1）泛指用a/ an，单数可数--泛指的单数可数名词前要用a/ an。2）特指用the--如果是特指，那么无论是可数名词单数、复数或不可数名词前均要用the。3）不特不the--不特指则不用the，包括泛指的可数名词单数前用a/ an，泛指的可数名词复数前不用冠词，泛指的不可数名词前也不用冠词三种情况。

定冠词：特指双熟悉，上文已提及，世上独一无二，序数最高级，某些专有名，习语及乐器。 （1）the用在\"特指\"谈话双方都知道的某个人或某些人或物前。如： where is the teacher？ 老师在哪里？

（2）the用在上文已提到的人或事物前。如： i can see a cat.the cat is lucy\"s.我能看见一只猫，那只猫是露茜的。

（3）the用在世界上独一无二的事物前。如： the earth goes around the sun.地球围绕着太阳转。

（4）the用在序数词或形容词最高级前。如：

mike is the tallest of the three boys.迈克是三个男孩中最高的一个。 （5）the用在由普通名词构成的专有名词前。如：the great wall（长城），the people\"s park（人民公园 ）等。

（6）the用在一些习惯用语中或乐器名词前。如：in the day（在白天），play the piano（弹钢琴）等。

不用冠词：代词限定名词前，专有名词不可数，复数名词表泛指，学科球类三餐饭，季节星期月份前，颜色语种和国名，称呼习语及头衔。

（1）名词前已有作定语用的this, that, these, those, my, your, his, her, our, their, some等限定词时，不用冠词。如：this eraser, her pencil-box, some boxes, those women等。

（2）泛指的不可数名词前一般不用冠词。如：meat, rice, water, bread, tea, milk, juice等。

（3）复数名词表示泛指时，不用冠词。如： the people in the room are doctors.房间里的那些人是医生。

（4）在表示学科的名词前一般不用冠词。如：chinese, english, maths, physics, history等。在三餐饭和球类运动名词前一般不加冠词。如：have breakfast/ lunch/ supper, play basketball/ football等。

（5）在季节、节日、星期、月份前不用冠词。如：autumn, summer, winter, spring, teacher\"s day, children\"s day, sunday, february等。

（6）在表颜色、语种和国家名词前不用冠词。如：white, brown, french, australia等。 （7）在表示称呼语的名词之前，以及职务、头衔的名词前不用冠词。如：

doctor green is a scientist.格林博士是位科学家。

有水无湖、有球无星、有山无峰、有独无欧

（二）、有（足）族无球（运动）、有文无章、学而不专：

1）有水无湖：海、洋、海湾、河等，都用the;单个湖不用the,(但多个湖用the); the red sea,the pacific ocean,the persian gulf, the yangtze river the great lakes(五大湖)；lake erie(伊利湖) 2）有球无星：地球，月亮用the;行星不用the: mars,venus; 3）有山无峰：the huangshan mountains(黄山)；mount everest(珠穆朗玛峰)； mount(or mt.) tai(泰山).4）有独无欧（偶）：独一无二的，the earth,the moon,the sun用the; 欧洲等七大洲不用the.europe,africa,asia,north america,south america,antarctica,oceania 5）有（足）族无球（运动）：种族用the:the indians(印第安人)；球类运动 baseball,basketball 6）有文无章：历史性的文件用the;小说等的章节不用the the constitution(宪法); chapter one 7）学而不专：学校放在词组的前面时用the;专有名词放在词组的前面时不用the; the university of fudan; fudan university

第三章 介词

一、定义

介词preposition缩写prep.，又叫前置词，表示其后的名词或代词（或是相当于名词的其他短语或从句）与其他句子成分的关系。介词是一种虚词，不能单独在句中作成分。

二、介词的用法

1、表示时间的（at、on、in、at、before ,after、by、until、through、from、since、within）

(1)at:用于表示时刻，时间的某一点。

at noon在午时 at night在夜间 at present目前

(2)on:用于星期，某天，某一天的上午、下午、晚上(指具体的某一天时，一律用) on sunday在星期天 on sunday morning 在星期天的上午 on march 8 在3月8日

(3)in:用于表示周、月、季节、年、泛指上午、下午、晚上。 in 1999 在1999年 in november 在11月份

in summer 在夏季 in the afternoon在下午 过......后(未来时间) i think he will be back in an hour .我想他一小时后就会回来。 i heard that she would be back in a month.我听说她一个月后回来的。

(4)before：在......之前

wei hua got up before 7 o\'clock this morning .今天早晨，魏华在7点之前起床了。

(5)after：在......之后

after that ,no noe should ever kill a seagull .从那时起，任何人不得捕杀海鸥。

(6)by：在......前(时间)，截止(到)...... by the time i arrived ,she had already gone . 在我到达之前，她已经走了。

(7)for：达......之久(表示过了多少时间),可以和一般现在时，过去时，将来时连用，但是经常和完成时连用。

florence often worked for twenty-four hours without rest . 弗洛沦斯常常工作24小时而不休息。

（8）during：在......期间

during the lifetime of one man ,north america and europe will more further apart by nearly two metres .在一个人的一生期间，北美洲和欧洲由于漂移，其间的距离将要增加差不多两米。

(9）through：一直......(从开始到结束) he ,who led the united states through these years ,was shot on april 14, 1865 ,at a theater in washington 领导美国度过了这些年代的他，于1865年4月14日在美国华盛顿一家戏院里被人枪杀。

(10）from：从......起(时间) the worders were made to work from 7 in the morning to 7 in the evening .工人们被迫从早7点工作到晚7点。

(11）since：自从......以来(表示从以前某时一直到现在仍在继续) since that time ,my eyes had never been very good.从那时起，我的眼睛一直不是很好。

(12)within:不......超过的范围

he will arrive within an hour .他一小时内就人到。

2、表示地点（at、in、on、under、over、above、below、near、by、between、among、around、around、in front of、behind、in、into、out of、along、acro、,through、to、for、from) (1) at:在某地点(表示比较狭窄的场所) at school上学 at home在家 at 320 xinfu district 在新抚区320号 at the station 在火车站

(2)in:在某地(表示比较宽敞的场所) she will arrive in shanghai at ten .10点她将到达上海。

(3)表示地点方向的on ,under ,over ,above ,below ①on:在......上面，有接触面 on the table 在桌子上面

②above:在......上方

sometimes juliana could hear planes above the trees. 有时朱莉安娜能听到树林上空的飞机声。 ③over:在......正上方，是under的反义词

over these tombs ,they built pyramids .在这些坟墓上，他们建起了金字塔。 ④under：在......下面，在......之内

the twin sisters put the basket under the tree .这姐俩把篮子放到了树下。

⑤below：在......下方，(不一定是正下方) three thousand metres below her ,she could see nothing except the thick jungle .3000米以下，除了茂密的丛林之外，她什么也看不见。

(4)near ,by ①near:近的，不远的(=not far)是的反义词,near还可以指时间，in the near future在不远的将来。

green\'s lake was a small lake near his home .格林湖是他家附近的一个小湖。 ②by:在......旁边，比的距离要近

juliana walked by the side of the river for six more long days .朱莉安娜沿着河岸又走了足足6天。

(5)between ,among ,around ①between:在两者之间

the differences between american english and british english are not very great .美国英语和英国英语之间的差别不是很大。

②among:在三者或者更多的之中

there are some american students among us .在我们中间有几个美国学校。 ③around:环绕，在.....的周围，在......的四周

they arrived at a valley with high mountains all around it .他们到达了四周有高山环绕的山谷

(6)in front of ,behind ①in front of :在......的前面

there is a car in front of the house .房子前面有一辆小汽车。 ②behind :在.....后边

are there any cows behind the house ?房子后面有一些牛吗？

(7)in ,into ,out of ①in:在.....之内，用于表示静止的位置 there are four girls in the room.房间里有4个女孩。

②into:进入,用于表示有特定终点的运动方向，通常用于表示动作的动作之后。如:come ,go ,walk ,jump ,run.. she took me from the hall into my claroom .她把我从门厅带进我的教室里边去。

(8)along ,acro ,through ①along:沿着

go along zhongshan road and turn right at the second croing . 沿着中山路走然后在第二个十这路口向右拐。 ②acro:横过(平面物体) very slowly,the continents are moving acro the face of the world .各个洲在地球表面缓缓漂移。

③through:贯通，通过

the students walked through the gate with uncle wang .学生们随着王叔叔通过大门。

(9)to ,for ,from ①到达......地点(目的地)或方向

where\'s jack? he has gone to london.杰克上哪了？他去伦敦了。 ②for：表示目的，为了......do you know what he comes here for ? 你知道他为什么来这儿吗？ ③from：从......地点起

how far is it from london to new york? 从伦敦到纽约有多远？

3、表示手段和材料的介词用 （1）with ①和......在一起

these plates keep moving ,like great ships ,carrying the continents with them .这些板块载着各个大陆，像航船一样不断地漂移。 ②具有，带有

a person with good manners is always kind and polite.有礼貌的人总是和和气气，彬彬有礼的。

③用某种工具或方法

he could swim with some special swimming shoes. 穿着一些特制的游泳鞋，他能游泳。

(2）in:表示用什么材料(例如：墨水，铅笔等)或用什么语言。表示衣着，声调特点时，不用with而用in。

what\'s this in english.这个用英语怎么说？

(3）by:通过......方法，手段

what do you mean by the word\"island\"？ \"island\"是什么意思 i prefer traveling by train .我更喜欢乘火车旅行。

4、其他

(1） of , from ①of 属于)......的，表示.....的数量或种类

it was beginning of the term .这是学期开始的时候。 ②from:来自(某地，某人)，以....起始

she is a lady from canada .她是一位加拿大的女士。

(2)without ,like ,as ①without :没有，是with的反义词

she often worked for twenty-four without rest .她通常工作24小时而不休息。 ②like:像......一样

like many children of her age ,ding fang is a young pioneer .像很多同龄的孩子一样同，丁芳是个少先队员。 ③as:作为

they are carrying us as paengers.它们把我们当作乘客运载着。

(3)against:反对。靠着

everyone tried to fight against the locusts .所有的人奋力扑打蝗虫。

(4) about: ① 关于，各处，四周

nightingale wrote a book about nursing .南丁格尔写了一部关于护理方面的书。 ② 询问某人，某物的情况或提出建议 what about your family ? 你家里人怎么样？

口 诀

口诀1:年月周前要用in，日子前面却不行。遇到几号要用on，上午下午又是in。要说某日上下午，用on换in才能行。午夜黄昏用at，黎明用它也不借。 at也在时分前，说\"差\"用to，说\"过\"要用part。

口诀2: in在......里， out在......外，在旁边的是beside，靠近的为by 。 on在......上，

under在......下， above在上头， below在底下。

口诀3: this、that、tomorrow，yesterday，next、last、one。接年、月、季、星期、周，介词省略已习惯。 over、under正上下，above、below则不然，若与数量词连用，混合使用亦无关。\' beyond超出、无、不能，against靠着，对与反。besides，except分内外，among之内along沿。

同类比较except，加for异类记心间。

口诀4:before、after表一点, ago、later表一段。 before能接完成时，ago过去极有限。

since以来during间，since时态多变换。 与之相比beside，除了last but one。 口诀5：

①早、午、晚要用in 例：in the morning 在早上 in the afternoon 在下午

in the evening 在晚上

in the day 在白天

②黎明、午、夜、点与分用at 例: at dawn, at daybreak 在黎明时候 at noon 在中午

at night 在夜间

at midnight 在午夜 at six o\'clock 在6点钟

at 7：30 (seven thirty) 在7点半

at half past eleven 在11点半

at nine fifteen 在9点15分

at ten thirty a.m.在上午10点30分

at the weekend 在周末

③年、月、年月、季节、周用in。 例；in 1986 在1986年 in 1927 在1927年

in april 在四月

in march 在三月

in december 1986 1986年12月

in july l983 1983年7月

in spring 在春季 in summer 在夏季

in autumn 在秋季 in winter 在冬季

in the fist week of this semester 这学期的第一周

in the third week 在第三周

④阳光、灯、影、衣、冒 雨用in，在阳光下，在灯下，在树阴下，穿衣、着装、冒雨等都要用in。

例：don\'t read in dim light.切勿在暗淡的灯光下看书。 they are reviewing their leons in the bright light.他们在明亮的灯光下复习功课。 they are sitting in the shade of a tree.他们坐在树阴下乘凉。he went in the rain to meet me at the station.他冒雨到车站去接我。in the bright sunlight 在明亮的阳光下 the woman in white 穿着白色衣服的妇女

⑤将来时态in...以后 例: they will come back in 10 days.他们将10天以后回来。 i\'ll come round in a day or two.我一两天就回来。 we\'ll be back in no time.我们一会儿就回来。 come and see me in two days\' time.两天后来看我。(从现在开始) after...(从过去开始)

⑥小处at大处in i\'m in liaoning, at anshan.我住在辽宁省鞍山市． 有形with无形by，语言、单位、材料in

例：the workers are paving a road with stone.工人们正用石子铺路。(有形)

the teacher is correcting the paper with a new pen. 这位教师正用一支新笔批改论文。(有形)

\"taking tiger mountain by strategy\" is a good opera. >是-出好戏。(无形)

the product is separated by distilation into gasoline and gas oil.这种产品是用蒸馏分离出气油和粗柴油。 (表示方式、手段、方法--无形)

i really can\'t expre my idea in english freely in-deed． 我确实不能用英语流利地表达我的思想。 (表示某种语言用in) the kilometer is the biggest unit of length in the metric system． 公里是米制中最长的长度单位。 (表示度、量、衡单位的用in ) this board was cast in bronze not in gold.这个牌匾是铜铸的，不是金铸的。 ⑦特征、方面与方式、心情成语惯用in 特征或状态：

they found the patient in a coma.他们发现病人处于昏迷状态。

he has not been in good health for some years.他几年来身体一直不好。 the house was in ruins.这房屋成了废墟。

her clothes were in rags.她的衣跟穿破了。

还有一些心理短语也用in，如： in jest 诙谐地，in joke 开玩笑地，in spite 恶意地， in fairne 公正地，in revenge 报复, in mercy 宽大，in sorrow 伤心地等。 ⑧介词at、to表方向，攻击、位置、善、恶、分\"。

介词at和to都可以表示方向; 用at表示方向时，侧重于攻击的目标，往往表示恶意；用to表示方向时，突出运动的位置或动作的对象，侧重表示善意。 she came at me.她向我扑过来。

she came to me.她向我走过来。

he shouted at the old man.他大声喝斥那老人。 he shouted to the old man.他大声向那老人说

she talked at you just now.她刚才还说你坏话呢。 she talked to you just now.她刚才还同你谈话呢. she threw a bone at the dog.她用一块骨头砸狗。 she threw a bone to the dog.她把一块骨头扔给狗吃

第12篇：小学英语语法

一个完整的英语句子，单词的数量最好不要超过20个，否则的话，句子偏长，听话人的注意力有可能不集中，漏听

一、两个单词，从而影响对整个句子的理解。为了避免句子冗长，通常采取两种办法：一种是将一个长句子划分为几个短句子，每个短句子之间有语气上的停顿，让听话人有间歇的感觉;另外一种则是简化句子的单词构成，用一些简单的单词，代替一些复杂的单词。下面给各位介绍三种常用的简化方法：

第一种方法是用一个单词代替一组意义相同的单词，比如：

用forget(忘记)代替do not remember(没有记住)

用ignore(忽视)代替do not pay attention to(不注意)

用now(现在)代替at this point in time(此时此刻)

用because(由于)代替due to the fact that(鉴于下列事实)

第二种方法是省略同义词或近义词，比如在下面例句中，形容词important(重要的)和significant(有重要意义的)，就是两个同义词(也可以说是近义词)，我们可以省略important，只保留significant。

The government project is important and significant.(这项政府计划是重要的，有重要意义。)

The government project is significant.(这项政府计划有重要意义。)

第三种方法是在不改变句子含义的前提下，省略所有可以省略的单词，比如在下面例句中，the cover of the book(书的封面)可以省略成the book cover，is red in color(是红色的)可以省略成is red。

The cover of the book is red in color.(书的封面是红色的)

The book cover is red.(书的封面是红色的)

最后我们把这三种方法结合起来，将一个冗长、绕嘴的句子，改写成一个简短、易懂的句子。

University malls must be acceible and free from congestion in order that students, faculty and employees may have unobstructed paage through those areas of the campus.(校内道路必须是便于通行的，不拥堵的，以便让学生、教师和职员能够无阻碍地通过，到达校园的各处。)

University malls must be free enough from congestion to allow people to walk through easily.(校内道路不应当拥堵，以便人们顺利通行。)

第13篇：英语语法小结

顺口溜教你如何学好英语

英语语法知识点及单词众多，枯燥繁杂，对于大部分同学来讲记忆起来往往比较困难，人们的记忆似乎又是有限的，学的东西多了，难免会忘记，会记错。那不如来看看下面为大家搜集的这些顺口溜，让他们来教你如何能更好的学好英语，而且不容易去忘记。

时间名词前所用介词的速记歌

年月周前要用in，日子前面却不行。

遇到几号要用on，上午下午又是in。

要说某日上下午，用on换in才能行。

午夜黄昏须用at，黎明用它也不错。

at也用在时分前，说“差”可要用上to，

说“过”只可使用past，多说多练牢牢记，

莫让岁月空蹉跎。

be made of 和be made from 巧记

物质不变用of, 物质变化from, 如果物质不明白，可问君自何处来？

out of question和out of the question

无the“无问题”，（毫无疑问）

有the“有问题”，（不可能）

巧记不规则名词单变复

男女脚步牙鹅，老鼠加虱婆。

man-men; woman-women; foot-feet; tooth-teeth; goose-geese; mouse-mice; louse-lice.

区分long before 和before long

long 在前（long before)，“很久前”， long在后(before long)，“不久后”。

巧记lie和lay

躺 lie,lay,lain,lie in bed again;

撒谎 lie,lied,lied,don\'t be a liar;

产蛋 lay,laid,laid,a hen laid an egg;

或者记住以下口诀也不错：

规则的“撒谎”，不规则的“躺”，“躺”过就“下蛋”。“下蛋”不规则。

“规则”指规则变化，“不规则”即不规则变化，如lie作“撒谎”解时，是规则变化，即其过去式和过去分词直接加-d：“躺过”的“过”指的是过去式，即lie的过去式lay是“下蛋”的原形：“下蛋”是不规则变化。

基数词变序数词歌

基变序，有规律, 词尾加上-th (fourth,sixth)

一、

二、三，特殊例，结尾字母t,d,d(first,second,third)

八去t,九去e,(eighth,ninth), ve要用 f替;(fifth,twelfth)

ty将y改成i, th前面有个e。

加-ing要双写的常见动词

一个m，两个d和g

(swim) (nod, rid) (dig, beg)

三n，四p，十个t

(run, win, begin)

(dip, drop, mop, stop)

(sit, hit, fit, set, get, let, put, regret, forget, pat)

before和ago巧记

before带在点之前，ago总在段之后。

before时态不确定，过去时中用ago。

A Fu\'s Cap（阿福的帽子）

常见的要求跟动名词作宾语，跟不定式作宾语的动词有：

advise, forbid, understand, suppose, consider, allow, permit.接首字母即为A Fu\'s Cap（阿福的帽子）

冠词基本用法口诀

名词是秃子，常要戴帽子，可数名词单，须用a或an，

辅音前用a， an在元音前，若为特指时，则须用定冠the，

复数不可数，泛指the不见，碰到代词时，冠词均不现。

与sometime易混淆词汇区分：

分开“一段时间”, some time表示“一段时间”；

相聚“在某一时”, sometime表示“在某一时”；

“有时”相聚加s，sometimes表示“有时，不时”；

“几次”分开带s，some times表示“几次，次数”。

以o结尾名词变复数

连

一个有信仰的海湾首领叫农奴到屋顶拿手帕。（belief，gulf，chief，serf，roof，handkerchief后接s）

工作间里有架钢琴，钢琴上有台收音机，收音机旁有幅照片，照片里有动物园，动物园里有竹子。（studio，piano，radio，photo，zoo，bamboo后接s）

其实，以o结尾的名词单数变复数的规则至为简单，用不到什么口诀，只需记住一句话：

有生命的加-es，无生命的加-s.

（火山有死活之分，故volcano的复数形式为 volcanoes.）

或者熟记下列口诀：

A.“两人两菜”（hero,negro,potato,tomato)

B.一句话 Negroes and heroes like to eat potatoes and tomatoes

C。有生命的加Es，无生命的加-s.

倒装口诀

副词开头要例装，人称代词则如常。

only修饰副介状，位于句首半倒装。

否定意义副连词，“既不…也不”须倒装。

表语前置主语长，衔接自然常倒装。

such代词做表语，引起主谓要倒装。

Not only开头句，前一分句须倒装。

had，were，should虚拟句，省略if半倒装。

动词不定式做宾语补足语省略不定式符号“to”的特殊动词

一些动词要掌握，have， let和make，

此三动词是使役，“注意”“观察”“听到”see，

还有feel和watch，使用它们要仔细，

后接“宾补”略去“to”，此点千万要牢记

除此之外，还可以掌握“八字言”，

一感feel，二听hear， listen to， 三让have， let， make，四看see， look at， observe， watch

使用口诀：

感使动词真奇怪，to在句中象妖怪。 主动句里它走开，被动句里它回来。动词let要除外，to词可来可不来。

后只接动名词做宾语的一些常用特殊动词

特殊动词接“动名”，使用它们要记清，

“放弃”“享受”可“后悔”，

“坚持”“练习”必“完成”，

“延期”“避免”非“介意”

掌握它们今必行。

记住f(e)结尾的名词复数

妻子持刀去宰狼，小偷吓得发了慌；（wife, knife, thief）

躲在架后保己命，半片树叶遮目光。( shelf, leaf)

I Drop Caps

在某些表示请求、命令、建议等动词后面的宾语从句中，谓语动词要用动词原形或should+动词原形。

I—insist, d—denand, r—request/require/recommend, o—order, p—propose, c—command, a—advise, p—preqersic, s—suggest.

WITHSPEM

有些动词用过去完成时，常表示“想做而未做”的意思。可巧记其首字为组成的“withspem”，代表：wish, intend, think, hope, suppose, plan, expect, mean

另附巧口诀让你轻松背英文单词

1.马戏团的鹦鹉

它一岁的age（年纪）

会说人的language(语言)

头脑很懂manage(经营)

要求增加wage(薪水)

惹得老板rage(发怒 )

把它关进cage(笼子)

2.败家女的生活

天生就很lazy（懒惰的）

生活就爱cozy（舒适的）

上街血拼crazy（疯狂的）

体胖心感uneasy（不安的）

减肥虚脱dizzy（头晕眼花的）

成天沉溺fantasy（幻想）

3.贫农发家史

下播下seed（种子）

种出却是weed（杂草）

只能当作feed（饲料）

生存无法proceed（继续）

冒险去采seaweed（海带） 脚被刺伤bleed（流血）

拼命加快speed（速度）

回来销售succeed（成功）

见财心生greed（贪婪）

4.武术冠军擒贼

那天我骑着cycle（自行车）见有人偷旧bicycle（自行车） 还美其名曰recycle（回收利用）

我便鼓起了muscle（肌肉） 八卦掌划出semicircle（半圆）

擒贼被写进了article（文章）

5.英国的过去

大英帝国无bound（边界）

英联邦国家abound（大量存在） 流通货币是pound（英镑）

随处英语的sound（声音）

满城绅士牵hound（猎狗）

6.超级逃兵

行军方向forward（向前的）

他的方向backward（向后的）

逃跑方式awkward（笨拙的）

其实是个coward（懦夫）

7.掌舵手

有一个volunteer（志愿者） 把船来steer（驾驶）

快乐是sheer（纯粹的） 神情却queer（古怪的）

高傲像deer（鹿）

8.码头黑老大

野心相当large（大的）

想把地盘enlarge（扩大）

要想在这discharge（卸货）

保护费要overcharge（多收）

谁敢把我charge（控告）

9.便宜无好货

话说有个student（学生）

旅行需要tent（帐篷）

去到商店rent（租借）

只要几百cent（分）

野营发生accident（事故）

原来没有vent（通风孔）

骨架还全bent（弯曲）

奸商让人resent（愤恨）

10.排骨抢劫案

教堂旁边的shop（商店）

正大声播放pop（流行音乐）

卖美味红烧chop（排骨）

口水好像要drop（滴下）

无奈没有钱shop（买东西） 抢一盘朝外hop（跳跃）

越过绊脚的mop（拖把）

猛地撞上了bishop（主教）

被抓住交给cop（警察）

实践证明，在掌握英语语法的学习过程中，如果辅之以适当的记忆技巧，会达到事半功倍的作用，。上条英语口诀仅是很少的一部分，希望对同学们有所启发，也可以在在平时的英语学习中注意知识的积累，培养自己的归纳总结能力，编出适合自己记忆的英语口诀。

第14篇：小学英语语法

小学英语语法大全

小学的英语语法趋向于简单，却是初中高中英语语法的基础。下面是 给大家整理的小学英语语法的相关知识，供大家参阅! 小学英语语法：名词

一、定义：名词是表示人或事物名称的词。它既可以表示具体的东西，也可以是表示抽象的东西。

二、分类

1.名词可以根据意义分为普通名词和专有名词

如：john is a student.student是普通名词，john是专有名词 普通名词前可以用不定冠词a/an, 定冠词the 或不加冠词，专有名词前一般不加冠词，专有名词的首字母要大写。

2.普通名词又可以分为个体名词、集体名词、物质名词和抽象名词，其中个体名词与集体名词是可数名词，物质名词和抽象名称是不可数名词。

3.专有名词：专有名词是表示人名、地名、团体、机构、组织等的专有名词，多为独一无二的事物。

三、名词的数

1、名词分为可数名词和不可数名词。

可数名词——可以数的名词 不可数名词——数不清(没有复数) Drink： milk tea water orange juice coke coffee porridge

1 Food： rice bread meat fish fruit cake dumplings

2、可数名词与不定冠词a(an)连用有数数形式，不可数名词不能与不定冠词a(an)连用，没有复数形式 many+可数名词复数 much/a little+不可数名词

some, any , a lot of (lots of) 两者都可以修饰。

3、可数名词可以直接用数词来修饰 不可数名词：数词 +量词 +of + 名词 对可数名词的数量提问用how many 对不可数名词的数量提问用 how much

4、不可数名词的量有以下两种表示方法：

1) some, much ,a little ,a lot of ,a bit of , plenty of 用等表示多少。

※既可以与可数名词复数，又可以与不可数名词连用的有：plenty of ,some ,a lot of ,lots of ,most of 等。 如there is much water in the bottle .瓶中有很多水。

i\'ll tell you much good news.我要告诉你许多好消息。 we should collect some useful information我们应该收集一些有用的消息。

2) 用单位词表示。 用a ...of 表示。

如 a cup of ( 一杯......)，a bottle of (一瓶......) a piece of ( 一张......)，a pair of shoes(一双鞋)

2 如two cups of tea(两杯茶),five pieces of paper(五张纸) ※单位词后的动词单复数形式往往取决于单位词的单复数形式;千、百等数词与名词加用，表示复数时，数词仍保持单数，名词变复数。

如two hundred students(200名学生) ten thousand trees(10000棵树) 测试点he caught a lot of fish他抓到了许多鱼(此处为许多条鱼，fish的复数仍为fish或fishes) =he caught a lot of fishes.the paper is about some fresh-water fishes.这篇论文是有关几种淡水鱼的。(此处fish表示不同种类的鱼，加复数词尾-es)

5、可数名词分为单数和复数。

名词单数就是该词本身，在其前面加a或an。 1)单数 如a desk(一张桌子) an old desk(一张旧书桌) 2)复数：要表示一个以上概念时，要用名词复数形式 小学英语语法：冠 词

一、定义

冠词是一种虚词，本身不能单独使用，也没有词义，它用在名词的前面(相当于名词的帽子)，帮助指明名词的含义。

二、分类

共3类：定冠词(the definite article)，不定冠词(the indefinite article)、零冠词(zero article)。

三、用法

1、定冠词的用法

3 a、an与数词one 同源，是\"一个\"的意思。a用于辅音音素前，而an则用于元音音素前。

(1) 表示某一类人或某事物中的任何一个,经常用在第一次提到某人或某物时,用不定冠词起介绍教学资料

作用，表示一个。

i gave him a book yesterday .我昨天给了他一本书

i am reading an interesting story .我在读一则有趣的故事。 (2) 表示人或事物的某一种类, 强调整体, 即以其中的一个代表一类。

a horse is useful to mankind.马对人类有用。

(3) 不定冠词用在事物的\"单位\"前,如时间, 速度, 价格等意义的名词之前,表示 \"每一\"。 we often go to school two times a day.我们常常一天两次去学校。

i went to the library once a week at least.(4) 不定冠词用来指某人某物,但不具体说明任何人或任何物。 a boy came to see you a moment ago.刚才有一个小孩来找你。

(5)在序数词前表示\"又一;再一\"时。如: i want to read the story a second time 我想再读一遍这篇小说 。

(6) 表示不特定的\"某一个\"时。如: a mr.smith is calling on the phone.有一位史密斯先生来电

4 话找你 。

(7)在特定的短语里表示特定的含义，与不可数名词连用，如： have a good time 过得高兴 (8) 一日三餐前有修饰语时。如: -mum, what shall we have for lunch? -jiaozi.-oh, what a wonderful lunch! i enjoy it very much.(9) 在形容词最高级前表示\"非常\"时。如: leon nine is a most difficult leon, but it isn\'t the most difficult one.(10)不定冠词用于某些词组中。

a little / a few / a lot / a type of / a pile / a great many / many a / as a rule / in a hurry / in a minute / in a word / in a short while / after a while / have a cold / have a try / keep an eye on / all of a sudden 小学英语语法： 介词

一、定义

介词preposition缩写prep.，又叫前置词，表示其后的名词或代词(或是相当于名词的其他短语或从句)与其他句子成分的关系。介词是一种虚词，不能单独在句中作成分。

二、介词的用法

1、表示时间的(at、on、in、at、before ,after、by、until、through、from、since、within)

5 (1)at:用于表示时刻，时间的某一点。

at noon在午时 at night在夜间 at present目前

(2)on:用于星期，某天，某一天的上午、下午、晚上(指具体的某一天时，一律用) on sunday在星期天 on sunday morning 在星期天的上午

on march 8 在3月8日

(3)in:用于表示周、月、季节、年、泛指上午、下午、晚上。 in 1999 在1999年 in november 在11月份 in summer 在夏季 in the afternoon在下午 过……后(未来时间) i think he will be back in an hour .我想他一小时后就会回来。 i heard that she would be back in a month.我听说她一个月后回来的。

(4)before：在……之前

wei hua got up before 7 o’clock this morning .今天早晨，魏华在7点之前起床了。

(5)after：在……之后

after that ,no noe should ever kill a seagull .从那时起，任何人不得捕杀海鸥。

(6)by：在……前(时间)，截止(到)…… by the time i arrived ,she had already gone .在我到达之前，她已经走了。

6 (7)for：达……之久(表示过了多少时间),可以和一般现在时，过去时，将来时连用，但是经常和完成时连用。

florence often worked for twenty-four hours without rest .弗洛沦斯常常工作24小时而不休息。 (8)during：在……期间

during the lifetime of one man ,north america and europe will more further apart by nearly two metres .在一个人的一生期间，北美洲和欧洲由于漂移，其间的距离将要增加差不多两米。

(9)through：一直……(从开始到结束) he ,who led the united states through these years ,was shot on april 14, 1865 ,at a theater in washington 领导美国度过了这些年代的他，于1865年4月14日在美国华盛顿一家戏院里被人枪杀。

(10)from：从……起(时间) the worders were made to work from 7 in the morning to 7 in the evening .工人们被迫从早7点工作到晚7点。

(11)since：自从……以来(表示从以前某时一直到现在仍在继续) since that time ,my eyes had never been very good.从那时起，我的眼睛一直不是很好。

(12)within:不……超过的范围

he will arrive within an hour .他一小时内就人到。

7

2、表示地点(at、in、on、under、over、above、below、near、by、between、among、around、around、in front of、behind、in、into、out of、along、acro、,through、

to、for、from) (1) at:在某地点(表示比较狭窄的场所) at school上学 at home在家 at 320 xinfu district 在新抚区320号

at the station 在火车站

(2)in:在某地(表示比较宽敞的场所) she will arrive in shanghai at ten .10点她将到达上海。 (3)表示地点方向的on ,under ,over ,above ,below ①on:在……上面，有接触面 on the table 在桌子上面 ②above:在……上方

sometimes juliana could hear planes above the trees.有时朱莉安娜能听到树林上空的飞机声。

③over:在……正上方，是under的反义词 over these tombs ,they built pyramids .在这些坟墓上，他们建起了金字塔。

④under：在……下面，在……之内 the twin sisters put the basket under the tree .这姐俩把篮子放到了树下。

8 ⑤below：在……下方，(不一定是正下方) three thousand metres below her ,she could see nothing except the thick jungle .3000米以下，除了茂密的丛林之外，她什么也看不见。 看过小学英语语法的相关知识的人还

9

第15篇：英语语法小结

英语语法小结

根据以往英语取得高分同学的经验和海文英语辅导名师的建议，他们都一致认为英语语法和词汇是学好、考好英语的重要基础，其实完形填空是对语法、词汇的综合考查，但更关键的是学好此部分有助于对英语句子结构的分析和理解，有助于学生掌握灵活多变的句式，这样不仅有助于学生做好阅读理解，而且有助于学生做好英译汉，写好作文。

（一）情态动词

一．情态动词的现在完成式的用法

情态动词现在完成式主要有两个功能：表示已经发生的情况和表示虚拟语气。在这两个方面must/mustn’t,;can/cann’t;need/needn’t;may/mayn’t;might/mightn’t;should/shouldn’t; ougtht等情态动词＋完成式表示的意思是有一定区别的 1．表示已经发生的情况。 1）must have+过去分词，表示对已发生情况的肯定推测，译为“（昨天）一定……”。如：

My pain apparent the moment I walked into the room, for the first man I met asked sympathetically:” Are you feeling all right?”

[A] must be had been [C] must have been [D] had to be （答案为C）

2）can’t / couldn’t have+过去分词，表示对已发生情况的否定推测，译为“（昨天）一定没……”。如：

Mary my letter; otherwise she would have replied before now. [A] couldn’t have received ought to have received [C] has received [D] shouldn’t have received （答案为A）

3）may / might have +过去分词，表示对已发生的事情做不肯定、可能性很小的推测，或事实上根本没发生，译为“也许……”。如：

At Florida Power’s Crystal River plant, a potentially serious leakage of radioactive water may have been unknowingly caused by an electrician. 2．表示虚拟语气。

1) needn’t have + 过去分词，表示做了不必做的事，相当于”didn’t need to do”,译为“其实没必要……”。如：

You needn’t have come over yourself.

As it turned out to be a small house party, we so formally. [A] needn’t dre up did not need have dreed up [C] did not need dre up [D] needn’t have dreed up

(没有必要穿的那么正式，体现是说话者的建议，实际结果是否真的穿的很正式没有确定，答案为D)

2）should have +过去分词，表示应该做某事但实际上未做，译为“本应该……”should not + have过去分词表示本不应该做某事但实际上做了，译为“本不应该……”。如：

I regret having left the work unfinished; I should have planned everything ahead carefully. 我本来应该事先认真地把每件事情规划的很好，但实际上作者还是没有规划好，以至工作没有完成。

3) ought to have +过去分词，表示动作按理该发生了，但实际上未发生，译为“该……”，与should 的完成式含义类似。如：

Ｔhe porter ought to have called the fire-brigade as soon as he saw the fire in the stock, which went up in smoke .

4) could have +过去分词，表示过去本来可以做但却未做，译为“完全可以……”。这点与ought/should/ have +过去分词用法相似。如：

What you said is right, but you could have phrased it more tactfully.

5) may/ might have +过去分词，表示过去可以做但实际未做，译为“（那样）也许会……”。如：

It might have been better to include more punchy statistics and photos of equipment in the introduction to further aist first-time office automation managers. 二．几个情态动词常考的句型：

1)．may/might (just) as well “不妨，最好”，与had better相近； Since the flight was cancelled, you might as well go by train.

既然航班已经取消了，你不妨乘火车吧。相当于you had better go by train。 2) ．cannot / can’t…too …“越……越好，怎么也不过分”。注意这个句型的变体cannot…over….如：

You cannot be too careful when you drive a car.驾车时候，越小心越好。

The final chapter covers organizational change and development.This subject cannot be over emphasized .

3) ．usedn’t 或did’t use to 为used to (do) 的否定式。 4）．should 除了“应该”一层意思外，考研大纲还规定要掌握其“竟然”的意思。如：I didn’t expect that he should have behaved like that.我无法想象他竟然这样做。 三．情态动词被动关系的主动表达法

1． want, require, worth（形容词）后面接doing也可以表示被动意义。 Your hair wants cutting The book is worth reading The floor requires washing.

2．need既可以用need to be done 也可以使用need doing ，两种形式都表达被动的意义

The house needs painting= the house needs to be painted. The watch needed repairing= the watch needed to be repaired.

（二）形容词、副词及比较级最高级 一．形容词的修饰与位置

一般来说，从构词法角度来看，后缀”ly”往往是副词，但有的以“ly’结尾的词是形容词而不是副词，这点要注意；形容词一般可以在句子中做定语，表语等成份，但有些形容词在句子中只能做表语和只能做前置定语；这些形容词在修饰时候有一定的特殊性要引起大家的注意，下面做了一下归纳：

1 以-ly结尾的是形容词而不是副词： costly 昂贵的 lonely 孤独的

deadly 死一般的 lively 活泼的

friendly 友好的 silly 傻气的 kindly 热心肠的 likely 可能的

leisurely 悠闲的 ugly 长得丑的

brotherly 兄弟般的 monthly 每月的

earthly 尘世的

2 只作以“a”开头的很多形容词只能做表语：

afraid 害怕的 alike 相象的

awake 醒着的 alone 单独的，惟一的

alive 活着的 ashamed 羞愧的

asleep 睡着的 aware 意识到的、察觉到的

well 健康的 content 满意的

unable 无能的

3 只作前置定语的形容词

earthen 泥土做的，大地的 daily 每日的 latter 后面的

golden 金子般的 weekly 每周的 inner 里面的

silken 丝一般的 monthly 每月的 outer 外面的

wooden 木制的 yearly 每年的 elder 年长的

woolen 毛织的 former 前任的 mere 仅，只不过

only 惟一的 sheer 纯粹的 very 恰好的

little 小的 live 活的

4．下列动词既是实义动词又是系动词，注意用做系动词时，要求形容词做表语：

remain keep become, get, grow, go, come, turn, stay, stand, run, prove, seem, appear, look。

如：All those left undone may sound great in theory, but even the truest believer has great difficulty when it comes to specifics. 二．形容词与副词的比较级与最高级

1．考比较级时，考生应把握：

1）形容词和副词比较级的形式是否和比较连词对应出现，即是否符合原级比较及比较级的结构。如：

Do you enjoy listening to records? I find records are often , or better than an actual performance.

[A]as good as as good [C]good [D]good as

在这里as good as 比较连词与better than比较连词同时出现时候，不能省略任何一个介词。答案为A

On the whole, ambitious students are more likely to succeed in their studies than are those with little ambition.

2)比较的成分是否属于同类事物或同类概念，既是说比较要具有可比性。如：

The number of registered participants in this year’s marathon was half . [A] of last year’s those of last year’s

[C]of those of last year [D] that of last year’s

（前后相比的应该是今年和去年注册参加的人数“the number of”故代替它的应该是单数指示代词“that”，而不能选择B，those是指代participants，不是同类对比，答案为D。

Young readers, more often than not, find the novels of dickens far more exciting than Thackeray’s. 3)比较级与倍数词关系及其位置

原级结构中可插入表达倍数的词，表示为“为….若干倍”,当与有表示倍数比较的词在一起时候等，他们的位置是，倍数词+as…as…,或倍数词+more…than…，但again一般放在原级词之后，即 “as+原级＋again+as”.如：

Smoking is so harmful to personal health that it kills people each year than automobile accidents.

[A] seven more times seven times more [C] over seven times [D] seven times (答案为B)

“Do you regret paying five hundred dollars for the painting?”“No, I would gladly have paid for it.”

[A] twice so much twice as much [C] as much twice [D] so much twice (答案为B)

My uncle is as old again as I am

4）下列词和短语不用比较级形式却表示比较概念：

inferior, minor, senior, prior, prefer to, superior, major, junior, preferable, differ from, compared with, in comparison with, different from, rather than.如：

Their watch is to all the other watches on the market. [A] superior advantageous [C] super [D] beneficial （答案为A）

Prior to his departure, he addreed a letter to his daughter.(1986年考研题)

5）“比较级＋and +比较级”或“more and more/le and le +原级”以及“ever, steadily, daily等副词＋比较级”结构表示“越来越……”的意思，与这类结构搭配的常用动词有grow, get ,become等。前面两种情况更多地出现在进行时态中，注意的是这三种情况引导的比较级后面都不需要用than.如：

Things are getting worse and worse.

As I spoke to him he became le and le angry. Her health was becoming daily worse

The road got ever worse until there was no road at all = the road got worse and worse. 6)比较级前面可以用even, still, yet ,all the (more)等修饰语用以加强语气，表示“更加”的意思。如

Today it is even colder than yesterday I have yet more exciting news for you 7) 有关比较级的特殊句型：

A): not so much…as…与其说……不如说……

The chief reason for the population growth isn’t so much a rise in birth rates a fall in death rates as a result of improvements in medical care. [A] and as [C]but [D] or

人口增长的主要原因与其说是因为出生率的提高，还不如说是因为医疗的进步带来的死亡率下降的结果。答案为B

B) no/not any more…than…两者一样都不……

The heart is intelligent than the stomach, for they are both controlled by the brain. [A] not so not much [C]much more [D] no more （心脏和胃两者都不具有智力，他们都受大脑控制。答案为D）

There is no reason they should limit how much vitamin you take, they can limit how much water you drink.

[A] much more than no more than [C] no le than [D] any more than （答案为D）

C)no/not any le…than…两者一样,都……注意基本上与no/not any more…than意思相反

She is no le beautiful than her sister.她和她姐姐一样漂亮

D)just as… so… 正如……， ……也……（用倒装结构）

Just as the soil is a part of the earth, the atmosphere. [A] as it is the same is [C] so is [D] and so is （答案为C）

2．最高级形式应注意的问题：

1）最高级比较范围用介词in, over, of, among。

in, (all) over用于在某一范围内的比较，如：in China, all over the world.

of, among用于在同一群体内同类事物的比较，如：among the teachers, of the four drees.

注意：among…相当于one of …,不说among all…。这一点考生应与汉语表达区别开来

如：

all visible lights, red light has the longest and violet the shortest wavelength. [A] Among Of [C]For [D]To 答案为

2)比较级形式表示最高级意义时，比较对象的范围应用：

any other +单数名词

the other +复数名词

the others

anyone/anything else

上述词是用业将比较级结构转变成最高级意义的关键词语，切不可遗漏，尤其是other，否则会造成逻辑混乱的错误。如不能说：John runs faster than anyone.注意与汉语表达的不同。

3）most可以用来修饰形容词或副词，意思相当于very，用法区分单复数，但不能用定冠词the，如：a most interesting book, most expensive restaurants， 要注意与 “the +形容词最高级＋of + 名词”的结构表示的最高级的区别，如：

He spoke in the warmest of voices They have been most kind to me

Basketball is the most popular of sports in this country. Chinese is the most difficult of language Chinese is a most difficult language 三．不用比较级和最高级的形容词：

1）表示颜色的有：white, black

2）表示形态的有：round, square, oval, circular, triangular(三角形)，level

3)表示性质和特征的有：atomic, economic, scientific, sonic, golden, silvery, woolen, earthen, silent, full, empty, sure, dead, deaf, blind, lame, rainy 4)表示状态作表语的有：afraid, asleep, alive, ashamed, alone, aware, alike

5)表示时间、空间和方位的有：daily, weekly, monthly, annual, present, front, back, forward, backward, east, west, south, north, left, right, final 6)表示极限、主次、等级的有：maximum, minimum, utmost, main, major, chief minor, superior, inferior, senior, junior, super, favorite

7)含有绝对概念的有：absolute, entire, whole, total, perfect, excellent, thorough, complete.

四．平行结构与比较级

平行结构很多情况下是由形容词或副词的比较级或者暗含比较意味的连词引导的。如：

The ideal listener stays both inside and outside the music at the moment it is played and enjoys it almost as much as the composer at the moment he composes.

大多数情况下平行结构都是具有一定的比较含义的，有的是递进对比not only…but (also) ;prefer…to…;rather than有的是同类对比：and ;but；or；both… and…；either…or…; neither…nor…..平行结构测试时候注意以下几点：

1．注意比较结构中相比较的内容在语法形式上是否相同。如：

It is better to die one’s feet than .

[A]living on one’s knees live on one’s knees [C]on one’s knees [D]to live on one’s knees (答案为D)

Despite the temporary difficulties, the manager prefers increasing the output to decreasing it.

2．其他具有并列或比较意义的短语也可引导平行结构。

1）rather than, let alone 虽不是并列连词，但在结构上连接两个语法形式相同的成分。如：

We are taught that a busine letter should be written in a formal style in a personal style.

[A]rather than other than [C]better than [D]le than 答案为A

For the new country to survive, for its people to enjoy prosperity, new economic policies will be required.

[A] to name a few let alone [C]not to speak [D]let’s say （答案为B）

2）如果平行的两个成分在形式上是介词短语，而且介词相同，一般说来第二个介词不要省略。如：

At times, more care goes into the composition of newspaper and magazine advertisements than into the writing of the features and editorials.

（三）代词及其指代一致 一．代词的指代 1．that的指代作用

that指代不可数名词和单数可数名词（如是复数，用those），后面通常跟有修饰语，如出现在比较结构中的that of。如

Conversation calls for a willingne to alternate the role of speaker with that of listener, and it calls for occasional “digestive pauses” by both.这里that指代前面的the role。

No bread eaten by men is so sweet as that earned by his own labor. 2．one的指代作用

one指代带不定冠词的单数可数名词，复数为ones。the one指代带定冠词的单数可数名词。如：

A good writer is who can expre the commonplace in an uncommon way. [A] that he [C]one [D]this 答案为[C]

3．do的替代作用。

do代替动词，注意数和时态的变化。如：

For him to be re-elected, what is eential is not that his policy works , but that the public believe that it does. 二．代词指代一致问题

代词指代一致是指指代的名词在性、数、格上是否一致，或者所照应的名词词组在某些方面保持一致。

Each cigarette a person smokes does some harm, and eventually he may get a serious disease form its effect.

这里he指代前面的person。

It was during the 1920’s that the friendship between the two American writers Hemingway and Fitzgerald reached its highest point. 这里its指代前面的两人的friendship。

Our department was monitored by two supervisors, Bill and me. 这里me必须用宾格形式。

代词指代一致必须注意以下几个原则和规律： 1．邻近和靠近原则

由either … or, neither…nor, not only…but (also)连接先行词时候，如果两个先行词在数和性上保持一致，就用其相应的一直的人称代词；如果两个先行词在数或性上不一致，人称代词一般与邻近的先行词在数和性上保持一致。 Neither Mary nor Alice has her key with her.

Neither the package nor the letters have reached their destination If either David or Janet comes , he or she will want a drink

2．当no one, everyone, each,everybody, none ,anybody, someone, somebody用作主语或主语的限定词时候,或者anything, nothing, something everything等不定代词作主语时候，其相应的代词一般按照语法一致原则，采取单数形式。如： Everybody talked at the top of his voice. None of the boys can do it , can he? Everything is ready, isn’t it?

3．当主语为复数形式，后跟each作同位语时，如果each位于动词之前，其后的代词或相应的限定词用复数形式；如果 each位于动词之后，其后的代词或相应的限定词用单数形式。如： They each have two coats

we are each responsible for his own family 4．由and连接两个先行词，代词用复数 如：the tourist and businemen lost their luggage in the accident

（三）主谓一致问题

主谓一致是指主语与谓语在数上要一致。把握主谓一致问题，考生主要解决的是对不同结构的主语单复数的认定，进而选择适当的谓语。解决主谓一致主要遵循三个原则： 语法一致原则 意义一致原则 就近一致原则

第16篇：英语语法 教案

教

案

课程名称

英语语法

Lecture 1 Sentence Structure

教学重点及难点：

1.

The claification of bound morpheme and the frequently applied bound morphemes;

2.

The basic clause types and their transformation and expansion

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Basic Concepts of morphemes, words, phrases, clauses, and sentences; 2.

Ways of word-formation: affixation, derivation and composition; 3.

Ways of sentence analysis: one ways is to divide the predicate into predicate verb, object, complement and adverbial.The other way is to divide the predicate into two parts: the operator and the predication.4.

Basic clause types include SVC, SV, SVA, SVO, SVOA, SVOC, and SvoO.An affirmative clause can be transformed into a negative; a statement into a question, and a active clause into a paive.All these add varieties to the basic clause types.

Lecture 1 Sentence structure Owing to the fact that sentences in authentic language differ structurally in thousands of ways, what is described here as sentence structure, sentence elements, or sentence patterns is only concerned with the simple sentence, or rather with the clause.1.1 clause elements As has been pointed out before, the clause or the simple sentence is structurally a sequence of phrases and logically a construction of ―subject+ predicate‖.That is to say, the clause or the simple sentence is not just an agglomeration of phrases; it is a group of phrases organized into a construction of ―subject+ predicate‖.1) Subject and predicate A full-fledged clause can generally be divided into two parts: the subject and the predicate.The subject is the topic or theme of the sentence, which tell of what the sentence is about.The predicate says something about the subject and bear the new information which the speaker or writer wants to transmit to the listener or reader.The subject is generally realized by a noun phrase or an equivalent of noun phrase, while the construction of the predicate, which is more complicated, generally consists of a verb phrase with or without complementation.2) Two ways of sentence analysis To facilitate description of how English language works, sentences can be analyzed in two ways.One way is to divide the predicate into predicate verb, object, complement and adverbial.These elements together with the subject make the five clause elements.The other ways of sentence analysis is to divide the predicate into two parts: the operator and the predication.The operator is usually the auxiliary or the first auxiliary in a complex verb phrase, while the predication comprises the main verb with its complementation (object, complement or adverbial).1.2 basic clause types and their transformation and expansion In terms of the different combinations of clause elements, English clauses can be claified into seven basic types.Innumerable authentic sentences are structured on the basis of these clause types.1) Basic clause types The seven basic clause types are SVC, SV, SVA, SVO, SVOA, SVOC, and SVoO.These seven combinations of clause elements are wholly or largely determined by the main verb in the clause.The main verb in an SVC pattern is a linking or copula verb which must be followed by a subject complement.The main verb in an SV pattern is an intransitive verb which is not to be followed by any obligatory element except for a limited number of intransitive verbs which require an obligatory adverbial, thus constituting the pattern SVA.The main verb in an SVO pattern us a monotranstitive which must be followed by an object, and with some monotransitives the object must again be followed by an obligatory adverbial, thus constituting the pattern SVOA.The main verb in an SVOC pattern is a complex transitive verb which must be followed by an object+ object complement.The main verb in an SVoO pattern is a ditransitive verb which is to e followed by two objects: indirect and direct object.2) Transformation and expansion of basic clause types The basic clause types are all affirmative statements with verbs in the active voice.An affirmative clause can be transformed into a negative; s statement into a question; and an active clause into a paive.All these add varieties to the basic clause types.The basic clause types and their variants can also be expanded into larger grammatical units through adding modifiers at various levels, and these larger units can again be expanded through coordination and subordination into compound, complex and compound-complex sentences.

Lectures 2&3 Subject-verb Concord

教学重点及难点： 1.

The appliance of grammatical, notional and proximity concords in some special conditions;

2.

Problems of subject-verb concord.

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

The concepts of three principles guiding subject-verb concord: grammatical concord, notional concord and proximity concord.

2.

Problems of concord with a coordinate subject: concord with ―and‖ or ―both…and‖, concord with ―or‖/ ―either…or‖, ―nor‖/ ―neither…nor‖, ―not only…but also‖;

3.

Problems of concord with expreions of quality as subject: concord with expreion of definite quality as subject, concord with expreion of indefinite quality as subject;

4.

Other problems of subject-verb concord: problems of concord with a nominal clause as subject, subject-verb concord with a non-finite clause or subject, subject-verb concord in relative clauses, cleft-sentences, and existential sentences.

Lecture 2 Subject-verb Concord (I) 2.1 Guiding principles

1) Grammatical concord

2) Notional concord

3) Proximity 2.2 Problems of concord with nouns ending in -s Disease and game names ending in –s

They are mostly treated as singulars.

A few such names can be used either as singular or as plural.Subject names ending in –ics

Such names are generally singular nouns, but some such nouns are treated as plural when used in other senses than subject names. Geographical names ending in –s

Plural except for a few treated as singular when used as country names.4)

Other nouns ending in –s Disease and game names ending in –s

They are mostly treated as singulars.

A few such names can be used either as singular or as plural.

Measles, mumps, rickets, shingles, diabetes, arthritis, phlebitis, AIDS, etc.

Subject names ending in –ics

Such names are generally singular nouns, but some such nouns are treated as plural when used in other senses than subject names.

Acoustics, claics, electronics, informatics, linguistics, mechanics, optics, plastics, thermodynamics, etc.

Geographical names ending in –s

Plural except for a few treated as singular when used as country names.

Other nouns ending in –s

Calipers, compaes, flares, forceps, glaes, jeans, pants, pincers, pliers, scales, sciors, shades, shorts, suspenders, spectacles, etc.

2.3 problems of concord with collective nouns as subject 1) Collective nouns usually used as plural

People, police, cattle, militia, poultry, vermin, etc.2) Collective nouns usually used as singular

Foliage, cutlery, poetry, machinery, equipment, furniture, merchandise, etc.3) Collective nouns used either as plural or as singular

Couple, crew, government, majority, opposition ,etc 4) A committee, etc + plural noun

A committee / board / panel of

Lecture 3

Subject-verb Concord (II) Teaching Contents 3.1 Problems of concord with a coordinate subject 3.2 Problems of concord with expreions of quantity as subject 3.3 Other problems of subject-verb concord

3.1 Problems of concord with a coordinate subject Coordination by \"and\" or \"both …and\"

It is usually treated as plural when it refers to two or more than two persons/things, but it is singular when referring to one person or thing.e.g. Baseball and swimming are usually summer sports. Your friend and adviser has agreed to lend me his money.After \"each… and each…\" or \"every… and every…\", the verb is also in the singular form: e.g. Each man and each woman is asked to help.Every flower and every bush is to be cut down.

The indefinite pronouns anybody/anyone, everybody/everyone, nobody/no one, and somebody/someone combine with singular verb forms, even though co-referent pronouns and determiners may be plural forms.e.g.[Everybody]‘s doing what they think they‘re supposed to do.Nobody has their fridges repaired any more, they can‘t afford it.

each/every… he/she/they

e.g.At the moment each of the girls was too busy thinking about her own personal safety to care much about the luggage.But ―each/every+ singular n.… they/their‖ is right as well. e.g.Each of the students should have his/their own books.

Every member brings their own lunch.In such exams as TOEFL, the pronoun referring to

―nobody/everybody/everyone/someone/somebody/anybody/anyone/no one‖ can only be he/his instead of they/their.However, as English learners it must be known that ―everyone…they‖ is used more often than ―everyone…he‖.e.g.Everyone warned you, didn‘t they?

Has anybody brought their camera? No one could have blamed themselves for that.

Every one / each / each one /*every one of the students should have their/his own books.

2) Coordination by \"or\" / \"either…or\", \"neither…nor\", \"not only...but also\" Here the problem is dealt with according to the principle of proximity.e.g. My sisters or my brother is likely to be at home.

Either my father or my brothers are coming.

Informally we can have the following use: e.g.Neither he nor his wife have arrived.

In formal cases, especially in exams, ―neither‖ is used with singular verb.e.g.Neither of them is bright.When used with plural nouns in informal cases, ―neither‖ can also be used with plural verb.e.g.Neither of the books are/is very interesting.

---I can‘t swim.

----Neither can I.

--- He didn‘t like the play. ---Nor did we.Neither is usually in formal cases, but nor is often used in spoken English.

3) Subject + as well as, as much as, rather than, more than, no le than; with, along with, together with, in addition to, except + Verb (determined by the form of the subject e.g. Some of the workers, as well as the manager, were working during the holidays.No one except two students was late for the dinner.

3.2 Problems of concord with expreions of quantity as subject 1) Concord with expreion of definite quantity as subject

a) When regarded as a single unit, the verb is singular; when regarded as the individuals that constitute the quantity, the verb takes plural form.e.g. Twenty years in prison was the penalty he had to pay. b) a fraction/percentage + of-phrase+ (

d) one in/out of + Plural noun + Verb (fml.Singular; infml.plural) e.g.One in ten students has/have failed the exam.2) Concord with expreion of indefinite quantity as subject.a) all of/some of/ none of /half of/most of + noun phrase of indefinite quantity + (

Usage is fairly evenly divided between singular and plural concord with none of: e.g.None of us has been aboard except Vinck.None of us really believe it‘s ever going to happen not to us, she said at last.[Fiction] However, none alone shows a distinct preference for singular concord: e.g.[None] describes him/herself as such in the party‘s official literature.(NEWS) Plural concord is the norm in conversation, while in the written registers there is an overall preference for singular concord.

None of + N.+ V 1) 当none与不可数名词连用或指代不可数名词时，其谓语动词总是用单数。 e.g.I wanted some more coffee, but there was none left.2) 当none与复数名词连用或指代复数名词时，传统语法规定其谓语动词必须用单数。此用法得到英语教材和各类英语实体的肯定和强调。但是，实际应用中人们往往使用―概念一致‖原则，用动词的复数形式。所以，Quirk说：―用复数动词较为常见，并且，在正式用法中也为人们普遍接受。‖ e.g.None of the books has/have been placed on the shelves.None but the brave deserves the fair. 唯有勇者才配得上美女。

None are so deaf as those who will not hear. 不愿听从的人是最聋的人。

no one 单独使用时只用于指人。

e.g.No one should pride themselves on this result.但是，no one之后接-of短语时，既可指人也可指物。 e.g.No one of you could lift it.I reach three books on this subject, no one of which was helpful.None 既可指人也可指物。

e.g.How many elephants did you see? None.No one of them really understands the problems.

No one 与no-one在英语里是并存的，

目前尚未统一形式。No-one 为英国英语， 而no one是美国英语

b) lots of/heaps of/loads of/scads of/plenty of + noun phrase + (

There is a collection of pictures at the Town Hall.

a great deal / a great many

a great (good) deal之后要加介词of才能与名词连用，而a great (good) many可以直接与名词连用。另外，a great deal of跟不可数名词连用，而a great many则与可数名词连用。

e.g.The chest contained a great/good deal of money.

A great deal还可作形容词或副词比较级的修饰语 e.g.That job was a great deal easier.a lot of 既可跟不可数名词也可跟可数名词，谓语动词决定于名词的单复数。 e.g.There is a lot of beer in those bottles there.

lots of 与amounts of , quantities of 不同， 后两者是中心词而非修饰语。

e.g.Large amounts of money were spent on the bridge.Quantities of food were on the table.

a variety of + n.做主语时，其谓语动词决定于名词的数，也就是说，此处起作用的是概念一致原则。

e.g.A great variety of books were recently published.

a wide range of + pl.n.充当主语时，其谓语动词应用单数；a bouquet of flowers也是用单数。

e.g.A wide range of washing-machines and refrigerators is displayed in our showroom.

A bouquet of flowers was presented to the vicar‘s wife.

a set of + pl.n.做主语时，人们使用谓语动词的形式并不是很一致。

e.g.There is a set of rules that you must follow if you are going mountain-climbing.There are set of unscrupulous scoundrels.

d) determiner + species nouns (kind/type/sort) of + noun phrase (singular countable noun/uncountable noun) +verb (singular) e.g.This kind of apples is highly priced.

With countable nouns there tends to be agreement in number between the species noun and the following noun (e.g.that kind of thing v.all kinds of things).But we also find: Singular species noun + pl.noun e.g.I don‘t know what kind of dinosaurs they all are.

I mean, do we want these kind of people in our team?

Pl.species noun + singular noun e.g.Thieves tended to target certain types of car he said.e) many a + noun phrase + verb (singular)

more than one + singular noun + singular verb

more pl.noun + than one + pl.verb e.g.Many a man has sacrificed his life. More than one member has protested against the proposal.More persons than one have been involved.

f) In \"an average of/a majority of + noun phrase (pl.) + verb\", when noun is regarded as the individuals that constitute the quantity, the verb takes plural form; otherwise, it is singular.e.g.A majority of the town\'s younger men are moving to the city.

A majority of three votes to one was recorded.3.3 Other problems of subject-verb concord 1) Problems of concord with a nominal clause as subject When the subject is a nominal clause introduced

by what, which, how, why, whether, the verb usually takes the singular form.

But when two or more such clauses are coordinated by and or both…and, a plural verb is used.

e.g.What I saw was a car.

What I saw and think are no busine of yours.In SVC construction with a what-clause as subject,

when the subject complement is plural, or when the what-clause is plural in meaning, the verb of the main clause can be plural.e.g.What they want are promises.2) Subject-verb concord with a non-finite clause as subject Generally speaking, the verb is singular.But when two or more such clauses are coordinated by and, the verb of the main clause is singular when the subject refers to one thing, and is plural when the

subject refers to separate things.e.g.To eat well is all he asks.

3) Subject-verb concord in relative clauses one of + plural noun + relative clause (verb) the (only) one of + plural noun + relative clause (singular verb) 4) Subject-verb concord in cleft-sentences Here the verb is determined by the number of the focal element functioning as subject in the clause.I----am; me---third person singular number e.g. It is I who am to blame.It is me that is to blame.

5) Subject-verb concord in existential sentences Generally the verb is determined by the notional subject.When the notional subject is a coordinate construction, the verb form goes with the first coordinate element of the notional subject.But in informal style, esp.in spoken language, the verb is often singular.e.g. There is a book on the desk.

There is many people in the street.

There is more grace and le carelene.

American and Dutch beer are much lighter than British.

The short term and the long term loan are handled differently. 按英语惯用法，一个单数名词受前置限定时，如果此名词表示两个或两个以上的事物，根据概念一致的原则，其谓语动词用复数；但是当此类名词受后置限制时，其谓语动词用单数。

e.g.Beer from America and Holland is much lighter than British beer.

majority

许多英美出版的语法书和惯用法都指出，majority和minority不能与不可数名词连用。T.Wood 的―Current English Usage‖(p161)说： ―Majority may be used only for number with countable nouns, not for amount or quantity with ma nouns: The majority of the eggs were bad is correct; The majority of the butter was bad is not.Similarly, we cannot speak of the majority of the land/time/one‘s wealth.We must use most, or the greater part‖.

但是，Practical English Usage (1980)有一例： e.g.The majority of the damage is easy to repair.建议按照T.Wood的观点来使用the majority of。

Majority虽然在语法上是个单数名词， 但在概念上却具有复数的意义：most, almost all, many。因此一般与复数动词连用。e.g.The majority of children like sweets.

The majority of doctors believe smoking is harmful to health.若后面没有-of短语时，the majority 作主语时。如果泛指多数（与少数相对），谓语单复数均可。Eg， The majority is /are doing its/their best。//in favor of the plan。//against him。

1．如果指整体、统一体， majority 常被看作单数。

The majority is always able to impose its will on the minority。// is for him。 2.如果指多数中的各个成员, majority 被看成复数。

The majority are of different minds on the matter 3．如果指多出的数目， majority 看成单数。

Her Majority was 5 vote //His majority was a big (small )one..

the rest (+of noun) +verb 遵循概念一致原则，而非语法一致原则。 e.g.The rest are to wait for us. The rest needs no telling.

the + adjective 做主语：

1）当表示一类人的整体时，e.g.the young, the old, the poor, the rich, the blind, the dead, 谓语动词用复数。

e.g.The wise look to the wiser for advice.2）当表示具体的人，而不是某一类人的整体，谓语动词用单数形式。 e.g.The deceased is my uncle.3）表示抽象的概念或某种笼统的东西时，谓语动词用单数形式。 e.g.The best is yet to come.The unknown is always something to be feared.

Worth + of + pl.noun , 其谓语动词形式

取决于上下文和所表达的真正意思。当充当of宾语 的名词具有重要意义时，谓语动词用复数形式，当 所表达的价值具有重要意义时，则谓语动词用单数 形式。

e.g.Nearly a thousand pounds‘ worth of cigarettes were stolen.（此处重要的是香烟被盗）大约价值1000英镑的香烟被盗。

There is nearly a thousand pounds‘ worth of cigarettes on that shelf.（此处重要的是香烟的价值）在那个架子上的香烟价值大约为1000英镑

Leon 4

Noun and noun phrase

教学重点及难点：

Number forms of the collective, material, abstract and proper noun.

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Claification of nouns: simple, compound and derivative nouns, proper and common nouns, count and noncount nouns.

2.

Number forms of nouns: regular and irregular plural forms of nouns;

3.

Number forms of the collective, material, abstract and proper noun: number forms of the collective noun, number forms of the material nouns, number forms of the abstract noun, number forms of the proper noun;

4.

Partitives: the definition of partitives, general partitives, partitives related to the shape of things, partitives related to volume, partitives related to the state of action, Partitives denoting pairs, groups, flocks.

Lecture 4 Noun and Noun Phrase

Teaching Contents 4.1 Claification of nouns and function of noun phrases 4.2 Number forms of nouns 4.3 Partitives 4.1 Claification of nouns and function of noun phrases 1) Claification of nouns a) Simple, compound and derivative nouns: by word-formation b) Common and proper nouns: by lexical meaning C) Countable noun and uncountable noun This claification is based on the grammatical features of nouns instead of whether they are countable.Regarding grammatical features, uncountable nouns cannot have numeral before them (*two information), have no plural forms (*informations) and cannot be modified by ―how many‖ but by ―how much‖

2) Functions of noun phrases Nouns can function as all the elements in a sentence except the predicative verb.e.g.They elected him chairman of the board.

He returned last night.

A photo is taken each time this button is pushed

The general pattern of noun phrase is

(Determiner)+ (premodifier)+noun+(postmodifier) The premodifier of noun phrase can be noun as well as adj.or participle.e.g.a table leg, water supply, the life sciences When noun is used as premodifier, it can be either singular, plural, or both. (1) Singular noun as premodifier e.g.table legs = legs of a table / tables

a shoe store = a store that sells shoes

a car race = a race between cars

a kitchen sink = a sink in a kitchen When the plural noun in the postmodifier is changed into premodifier, it usually becomes singular. e.g.a cloth for dishes = a dish cloth

decay of teeth = tooth decay

a station for buses = a bus station

a pocket for trousers = a trouser pocket

a tray for ashes = an ash tray (2)Singular or plural noun as premodifier

a.There is ambiguity here.

foreign language(s) department= department of foreign languages

(foreign language department = department of a foreign language) soft drinks manufacturer = manufacturer that produces several kinds of soft drink soft drink manufacturer = manufacturer that produces one kind of soft drink b.different meanings

e.g.an art degree = a degree in fine art an Arts degree = a degree in the humanities (3) Only plural noun as premodifier e.g.a customs officer, a goods train, clothes hanger, sales technique, contents bill, savings bank

It is more popular to use plural nouns as premodifiers in British English than in American English.Now it tends to increase.

(4) When the head of the noun phrase is collective noun or name of an organization, the plural noun as the premodifier can have two forms, but the same meaning.e.g.Scientists(‘) Institute for Public Information But the singular noun is seldom used.e.g.Yibin Teachers/ Teachers‘/ *Teacher‘s College 4.2 Number forms of nouns

Number is a grammatical distinction which determines whether a noun or determiner is singular or plural.1) Regular and irregular plural The regular is formed by adding –s or –es to the base, while the irregular is formed by changing the internal vowel or by changing the ending of the noun.

Irregular plurals also include some words of foreign origin, borrowed from Greek, Latin or French.Their plural forms are known as ―foreign plurals‖, e.g.basis—bases, criterion—criteria.Some borrowed words have two plural forms: a foreign plural and an English one.e.g.medium—media – mediums For some, their singular and plural number share the same form,

A) Animal names Singular form and regular plural coexist: Antelope, elk, fish, flounder, herring, reindeer, shrimp, woodcock （羚羊，麋，鱼，比目鱼，鲱鱼，驯鹿，虾，丘鹬（别名山鹬） e.g.He caught several fish/three little fishes.

They went catching shrimp/shrimps.

I shot two elk/elks. b) Singular form is usually used: bison, grouse, quail, salmon, swine （野牛 , 松鸡，鹌鹑，鲑（大麻哈鱼），猪） e.g.The farmer raises many quail/quails and chickens.c) Singular form is always used: cod, deer, mackerel, trout, sheep.（鳕，鹿，鲐鱼，真鳟）e.g.This is a deer.

Those are deer.

B).Nationality nouns Some words ending in sound /z/ or /s/ use singular form: Chinese, Japanese, Lebanese, Portuguese, Sinhalese, Vietnamese, Swi e.g.I am a Chinese.

There are four Chinese in the training cla.C) Quantitative nouns (hundred/thousand/million/billion) a) Cardinal numeral + hundred/thousand/million/billion +n.e.g.two hundred / *two hundred of years ago That‘s going to take hundreds of/*hundreds years.

Cardinal numeral + million + n.Cardinal numeral + millions of + n.e.g.three millions of dollars

three million dollars When the noun is omitted, if it is not monetary unit, the singular form is more often used than the plural form; if it is, the regular plural form is used.e.g.The population rose to four million / millions.

The firm had to pay three millions.

b) several/many/a few + singular / plural (of)+ n.e.g.He has played the part several hundred times / several hundreds of times.some + regular plural + n.e.g.He has played the piano some hundreds of times / many, many times.(some hundred times = about a hundred times) c) dozen, score e.g.She bought three score (of) eggs.

I have been there dozens of times.

He has already asked me several dozens of/ many scores of times.

2) Number forms of the collective, material, abstract and proper nouns a) Number forms of the collective noun Some are countable, while some are not.Countable nouns behave like individual nouns.An uncountable one has no plural form; if we want to count the number, we will use a kind of individual noun related semantically to the collective, e.g.poetry—poem.

Some collective nouns can be used in either singular or plural sense.The following verb is determined by the singular or plural sense.b) Number forms of the material noun Generally they are [U] and have no plural form.However, some items can be used either uncountably or countably.

Some material nouns can take plural endings to convey the large quantity or scope , e.g.sand/sands, snow/snows

Sometimes material nouns are [C] to expre ―one type of‖ or ―various types of‖ this material.e.g.I n Britain tea is usually drunk with sugar in it.

I‘d like to have a famous tea.

We hardly bought wine at lunch time. We like wines and liquors.Some material nouns become [C] to expre ―packet of ‖, ―cups of‖.e.g.How many beers were you wanting?

How many tins of beer were you wanting? When referring to the material itself, they are [U]; otherwise, they are [C], e.g.stone, rubber

c) Number forms of the abstract noun Mostly they are [U] and cannot take such determiners as a/one or plural forms.A few are [C], e.g.victory—victories.

Some are not [C], although they have plural endings, e.g.*several difficulties.The addition of a plural ending to some can change the meaning of the base, e.g.experience—experiences.

Some can only use singular form with ―a‖, some only plural form, some both.e.g.He has a dislike/dread/hatred/horror/love of cats.He had a good knowledge of mathematics.Give my best regards to your parents.He refused with much regret / many regrets.I have a suspicion / suspicions that he‘s right.

Some abstract nouns can have indefinite article to expre ―a type of‖ or ―an example of‖.

a) Some can have an indefinite article only if modifier exists.e.g.They are doing *a busine / a brisk busine.

I attach an exaggerated importance/importance to regular exercise.b) If modifier is implied, ―a/an‖ can appear.

e.g.She has had an education (= a good education).c) Some can have ―a/an‖ regardle of modifier.

e.g.A knowledge/ A good knowledge of English is eential.

d) Number forms of the proper noun They have no plural forms, except for such proper name as the United States, the Philippines, the Netherlands.When one takes a plural ending, it takes on some characteristics of a common noun, e.g.the Browns

4.3 Partitives

They are also called unit nouns and used to denote a part of a whole or the quantity of an undifferentiated ma.

1) general partitives: piece, bit, item, article 2) partitives related to the shape of things: cake, bar, drop, ear, flight, grain, head, loaf, lump 3) partitives related to volume: bottle, bowl, pail, bucket, handful, spoonful.4) partitives related to the state of action: a fit of anger/coughing/laughter/fever 5) partitives denoting pairs, groups, flocks: pair, herd, litter, swarm, bench, troupe, shoal.

Leon 5 Genitive noun

教学重点及难点：

1.

The differences between ‗s genitive and of genitive;

2.

The use of independent genitive and double genitive

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Formation of genitive nouns, meanings of genitive nouns as poeive genitive, subjective genitive, objective genitive, genitive of origin, time, distance, etc, descriptive genitive;

2.

Use of genitive nouns: genitive nouns are mostly used as central determiners and therefore perform the same function as ―poeive determiners‖;

3.

Independent genitive and double genitive: independent genitive is used when the miing noun ahs occurred somewhere in the context, when the miing noun refers to somebody‘s house or residence, church, school, or other public buildings.The formation of double genitive and the difference between double genitive and of genitive.

Lecture 5

Genitive Noun Teaching Contents 5.1 Formation, meanings and uses of genitive nouns

5.2 Independent genitive and double genitive

Case is a grammatical category and denotes the changes in the form of a noun or a pronoun showing its relationship with other words in a sentence.As modern English is basically an analytic language, English nouns have not a complicated case system like that of Latin, German, or modern Ruian.The different grammatical functions of English nouns in a sentence are mostly determined by the word order, not by case form.It is in this sense that the genitive case may be viewed as a relic of the old case system.The genitive was traditionally labelled as the poeive case.

Two Case systems: the unmarked common case and the marked genitive case: boy, boy‘s

The genitive case: the inflected genitive (the –s genitive)(屈折所属格） and the periphrastic genitive (the of-genitive)（迂回所属格） e.g.the children‘s toys,

the toys of children 5.1 Formation, meanings and uses of genitive nouns 1) Rules of formation of the –s genitive a) adding ‘s to singular nouns and to those plural nouns that don‘t end in –s , e.g.my mother‘s arrival, women‘s clothes

b) adding an apostrophe to plural nouns ending in –s, e.g.the teachers‘ college, the workers‘ achievements

c) adding ‘s to the compound nouns or to the end of a postmodified noun phrase, e.g.my brother-in-law‘s friend, a cat and dog‘s life, [the teacher of music]‘s room

d) In coordinate nouns, the genitive ending is added to each of the coordinate elements when denoting respective poeion, and only to the last coordinate element when denoting common poeion, e.g.America‘s and England‘s problems (respective);

America and England‘s problems (in common)

Coordinated genitive

1.The head of the noun phrase is singular: Charles and Louise‘s / Charles‘s and Louise‘s child is really lovely.(The child is a joint offspring of Charles and Louise.) 2.The head of the noun phrase is plural: Charles and Louise‘s / Charles‘s and Louise‘s children are really lovely.(The children are joint offspring of Charles and Louise.)

3.John‘s and Mary‘s children:

A.the children who are offspring of John and Mary B.John‘s child and Mary‘s child C.John‘s children and Mary‘s child D.John‘s child and Mary‘s children E.John‘s children and Mary‘s children Coordinated genitives are formal.Tom and his brother‘s children F

4.How to avoid ambiguity? a.I‘m interested in Henry and Herbert‘s book(s) / the book(s) of Henry and Herbert.b.Henry‘s house and Mr.Jones‘s are not far from here.5.―Or‖ only connects coordinated genitive Is that a lady‘s or gentleman‘s wrist-watch? Is that a wrist-watch of a lady or gentleman? I wonder whether it is Tom‘s or Peter‘s house / the house of Tom or Peter.

e) In the construction of ―noun phrase + appositive‖, the genitive ending is added to the end of the appositive, or both to the end of the noun phrase and to the appositive, e.g.Where is my clamate Nancy‘s car? Tom has gone to Basel‘s, the blacksmith‘s shop f) In personal names ending in sibilant /z/, the genitive ending can either be ‘s or an apostrophe only, but it can only be ‘s when personal names end in other sibilant sounds,

e.g.Burns‘ / Burns‘s poem (sibilant /z/);

Ro‘s poem

2) Meanings of genitive nouns The genitive is chiefly used to denote poeion, and therefore, is traditionally called ―poeive case‖.But genitive meanings are by no means restricted to poeion, as shown in the following: a) Poeive genitive,

e.g.my son‘s wife, Mrs.Johnson‘s paport

b) Subjective genitive, e.g.the student‘s application

c) Objective genitive e.g.the family‘s support d) Genitive of origin e.g.the girl‘s story

e) Descriptive (Claifying) genitive (not of-genitive) e.g.a women‘s college

(=college for women/*of women) f) Genitive of measure e.g.a four days‘ journey, two dollars‘ worth of apples

3) Uses of genitive nouns Genitive nouns are mostly used as central determiners and therefore perform the same function as ―poeive determiners‖, (traditionally called poeive pronouns), e.g.the boy‘s father= his father Mary‘s letter = her letter

a) As central determiners, genitive nouns can‘t collocate with other central determiner, nor can they be preceded by a premodifier.e.g.Mary‘s letter, * a Mary‘s letter;

Mary‘s interesting letter, * interesting Mary‘s letter

This, however, does not apply to some other genitive nouns such as the descriptive genitive and the genitive that denotes time, distance, value or measure.These genitive nouns are not used as determiners but as premodifiers in the noun phrases, e.g.a/the children‘s book, a pleasant three day‘s journey

Claifying genitive differ in a number of respects from specifying constructions.1) They respond to the question ―What kind of …?‖ rather than ―whose …?‖, which displays their similarity to adjectives and other such noun premodifiers, rather than to determiners.In fact, they cannot be replaced by poeive determiners.

2) They can be preceded by determiners and modifiers of the whole noun phrase, rather than of the genitive noun alone: a new children‘s book.This again is true also for adjective and noun premodifiers of nouns.

3) They form an inseparable combination with the following noun and do not usually allow an intervening adjective: *children‘s new book.

4) They are frequently paraphrased by a for-phrase rather than an of construction, as in books for children.Compare again constructions with noun premodifier like baby clothes.These characteristics reflect the close bond between a claifying genitive and the following head noun.

b) The choice of genitive

The –s genitive is favoured by the animate nouns in particular persons and animals with personal gender characteristics.The of- genitive is chiefly used with nouns denoting lower animals and with inanimate nouns.

The main factor governing the choice of the one or the other genitive form is the animate or rather the personal quality of the noun.But there is considerable overlap in the use of the two forms.The animate nouns normally take the –s genitive, but the of- genitive is also poible in most cases.Inanimate nouns regularly take the of-genitive, but a great many occur with the –s genitive.

The four claes of animate nouns normally take the –s genitive, but the of- genitive is also poible a) Personal names --- George Washington‘s statue, Susan‘s pupils b) Personal nouns --- the boy‘s new shirt, my sister-in-law‘s hat

c) Collective nouns --- the government‘s conviction, the majority‘s choice d) Higher animals

--- the horse‘s neck, the tiger‘s strips

The –s genitive is also used with certain kinds of inanimate nouns a) Geographical names --- continents: Europe‘s future --- countries: China‘s development

--- states: Minnesota‘s immigrants

--- cities/towns: Hollywood‘s studios, London‘s water supply

--- universities: Harvard‘s Linguistics Department b) Locative nouns denoting regions, heavenly bodies, institutions: ---the world‘s economic organization, the moon‘s interior, the school‘s history c) Temporal nouns --- a week‘s holiday

d) Nouns of special interest to human activity --- my life‘s aim, love‘s spirit, the novel‘s structure, the wine‘s character, television‘s future

The use of the –s genitive and of- genitive (1) We must use the –s genitive when…

a) the noun modified is followed by a post-modifier or an appositive. --- The monitor‘s brother, an actor was here then.b) it is a claifying genitive.--- Have you a copy of the teacher‘s book?

c) the –s genitive is used in some set expreions: --- a wolf in sheep‘s clothing

People don‘t get their money‘s worth.

*People don‘t get the worth of their money.

We must use the of- genitive when…

a) the noun in the of- phrase is followed by some modifiers or appositives --- Some sentences have been changed at the suggestion of the teachers present in the meeting.b) the definite article + -ed participle or adjective denoting a cla of people in the of- phrase structure --- the life of the poor c) the prepositional complementation in the of- phrase exprees the origin of the headword modified

--- the joy of his return (The joy derives from his return)

d) the genitive is used to expre the poeive relationship between part and whole --- the middle of the night --- the back of the claroom --- the top of the page --- the bottom of the ladder e) there are determiners before the two nouns --- their knowledge of her feeling --- this dog of the country

The difference between the –s genitive and the of- genitive (a) The –s genitive : regularity and continuity

the of- genitive : contingency of things --- my last week‘s article (每周一次的连载文章） --- my article of last week(偶尔刊登的文章） (b) The –s genitive: informal

the of- genitive: formal --- the woman next door‘s husband --- the foreign policy of China

(c) The –s genitive: literal sense (字面意义）

the of- genitive: extended meaning (引申意义）and symbolic meaning (象征意义）

--- the tree‘s top （树梢）

--- the top of the tree (出类拔萃） --- the table‘s top (桌面）

--- the top of the table （上座，首席）

5.2 Independent genitive and double genitive 1) Independent genitive When the genitive occurs without a following head, i.e.with the head of the noun phrase omitted, and functions independently as an element, it is called independent genitive.a) The noun occurring in the context can be retrieved --- My car is faster than John‘s (car).

b) Names and nouns referring to persons which denote residence:

See you at Harry‘s tomorrow.

--- Shall we meet at his brother‘s (house).

c) Proper nouns for certain well-known buildings:

St.Paul‘s (Cathedral), Queen‘s (College) St.James‘s (Palace) The noun: church, school, public buildings --- He lives near St.Paul‘s (Cathedral) in London.

d) Words for shops denoted by the type of shopkeeper: the baker‘s/butcher‘s/grocer‘s/greengrocer‘s commercial firms --- I buy my meat at Johnson‘s (shop).

2) Double genitive An independent genitive when functioning as prepositional complementation is called post-genitive.The prepositional phrase with a post-genitive as complementation is called double genitive.--- a friend of my father‘s 1) The use of the double genitive a) Partitive meaning denoting ―one of…‖ --- This is a book of my mother‘s.(one of …)

b.indefinite, definite, personal --- a friend of the doctor‘s( *the cover of a book‘s) Attention to some points a) Noun head with ―this, these, that, those‖: it has emotional colouring : praise, disapproval, pleasure, displeasure --- That child of his sister‘s is very clever.--- That son of Henry‘s is a rascal.

a boy of a girl 一般的of短语用来修饰或限制前面的名词的，但是，在此处：限定词+名词1+of + a/an + 名词2，of短语与前面的名词构成同位关系，而且名词2是概念的中心，of短语是对名词2进行修饰的，就像一个形容词：

an angel of a wife = an angelic wife; the fool of a policeman = the foolish policeman a boy of a girl 一个男孩气的女孩子 *一个女孩气的男孩 a palace of a house 宫殿般的房子

a great elephant of a woman 一个庞大如象的女人

此结构的特点是：名词2前必须使用不定冠词，而名词1前可用任何限定词(a, this, that, her, your) e.g.that dog of a landlord 狗地主

that great pig of a Louis XVIII 大肥猪路易十八

this / a / their palace of a house *these palaces of a house

b) Difference between double genitive and of phrase --- He is a friend of my father‘s.(many, one of them) --- He is a friend of my father.( in good terms) A: Who told you that? B: A friend of your father‘s.

A: If he says such things, he is not a friend of my father.c) The noun head: picture, portrait, printing, photograph, bust, statue The double genitive--- the picture that one keeps The of phrase--- the picture of one‘s own --- This is a portrait of Mr.Black‘s --- This is a portrait of Mr.Black d) The noun head: criticism, opinion, judgment,

--- a criticism of William‘s = a criticism offered by William --- a criticism of William = a criticism about William Correct the errors of the genitives if any: 1.Where‘s the dictionary of Cathy‘s?

2.I don‘t know whether this is a lady or a gentleman‘s wrist-watch.3.Her love of a child took the fancy of all of us.4.The poem of Shelly‘s he recited a hundred times was Ode to the West Wind. 5.Andrew and Horatia‘s eyes met.

1.that dictionary of Cathy‘s

2.a lady‘s or (a) gentleman‘s wristwatch 3.T 4.T 5.T

Leon 6 Determiners (I)

教学重点及难点：

1.collocations between determiners: predeterminers, central determiners and postdeterminers.

2.A Comparative study of some determiner usage: some, any, every ,much, etc.

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Collocations between determiners and nouns: determiners with all three claes of nouns, with singular count nouns, plural count nouns, noncount nouns, etc;

2.

Collocations between three kind of determiners: the category of predeterminer ,central determiner and postdeterminer, word order of three subclaes of determiners: predeterminer + central determiner + postdeterminer;

3.

A Comparative study of some determiner usage: many, much, a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a few, a little, some, any, all, both, every, each, either, neither.

Determiners, as a cla of words, include: article (definite article, indefinite article, and zero article), poeive determiners, genitive nouns, demonstrative determiners, relative determiners, interrogative determiners, indefinite determiners, cardinal and ordinal numerals, fractional and multiplicative numerals, and other quantifiers 6.1.Collocations between determiners and nouns

The choice of determiners is closely related to what might be called the three claes of nouns: singular count nouns, plural cont nouns and noucount nouns. These tree claes of nouns demand appropriate determiners to collocate with.Determiners with all three claes of nouns

Determiners such as poeive determiners, genitive nouns and the definite article as well as some any, no, the other, and whom can go with all the three claes of nouns, eg: The car the cars the money His car his cars his money Some book some books some money No book no books no money Whose book whose books whose money Determiners with singular count nouns only Determiners such as a(n), one, another, each, every, either, neither, many a ,such a can only collocate with singular count nouns, eg: Each worker every student Either book neither book Another book such a book Determiners with plural count nouns only Determiners such as, two, three, etc, another, two/ three, many, (a) few, several, these, those, a (great) number of can only collocate with plural count nouns, eg: Both workers

(a) few words Several girls

these / those tourists A number of men

many students Determiners with noncount nouns only Determiners such as a (little) bit of ,a great amount of ,a great deal of ,(a) little, much, le ,least can only collocate with noncount nouns, eg: Much noise (a) little courage A bit of fun

a large amount of money Le oil

(the) least oil Determiners with singular and plural count nouns only Determiners such as the first, the second, the last, the next can go with wither singular or plurals count nouns, eg‖ The first rose/ roses The last man/ men The next meeting/ meetings Determiners with singular and noncount nouns only Determiners such as this that can collocate with either singular or noncount nouns, eg: This/ that job

this / that work determiners with plural and noncount nouns only Determiners such as a lot of , lots of , plenty of, enough, most, such, other can go with plural and noncount nouns, but not with singular nouns,eg: Enough copies

enough bread More eays

more time Most people

most work This cla of determiners may also include le and least, which, as has been mentioned above, normally occur with noncount nouns, but in present day English, especially in formal style, may occasionally occur with plural nouns,eg: Le and le people can afford to go abroad for their holidays.Political programs on TV attract the least viewers.This use of le and least is regarded by some as non-standard.6.2) Collocations between determiners

As has been mentioned before, besides the collocations between determiners and nouns, there is the problem of word order between determiners if a noun 0phrase contains more than one determiner.Central determiners, predeterminers and postdeterminers According to their potential, determiners fall into three subclaes: central determiners, predeterminers and postdeterminers.Central determiners included: the article; demonstrative determiner; poeive determiners; genitive nouns; some, any, no, every, each, either, neither, enough; what(ever),which(ever),whose, etc.Note that central determiners are mutually exclusive and that no two members of the above-cited items ever occur together in a noun phrase.

Predeterminers are those hat precede central determiners. Predeterminers are also mutually exclusive. They include: all, both, half, double, twice, three times, etc.one-third, two-fifths, etc; what, such (a/an).Postdeterminers refer to those that follow central or predeterminers. Postdeterminers are not mutually exclusive, that is to say, two or more such items can co=occur in a noun phrase. This subcla includes: cardinal numerals; ordinal numerals; next, another ,etc; many much, (a_ few, (a) little, fewer, (the) fewest, le (the) least, more, most; several, plenty of , a lot of lots of , a great/large/good number of, a great/good deal of , a large/ small amount of ,such.Word order of three subclaes of determiners

When a noun phrase contains all three subclaes of determiners, their normal order is ―predetermine + central determiner + post determiner(s)‖: All the four students All these last few days Both his two sisters If the noun phrase contains only two of the subclaed, they follow the same order, ie ―predeterminer + central determiner‖:

Half his income Both his parents All the tourists ―central determiner+postdeterminer‖: the author‘s last books some such alloy his last few words ―predeterminer+postdeterminer‖: all three books all other students half such people

―postdeterminer+postdeterminer‖ several hundred tourists three other girls many more copies 6.3) A comparative study of some determiner usage many, much, a lot of ,lots of, plenty of

Leon 7 Determiners (II)--Articles

教学重点及难点：

1.

Articles in use with different claes of nouns;

2.

Some phrases applied with definite, indefinite and zero articles

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Generic and specific reference: generic reference, specific reference, anaphoric, cataphoric and situational reference.

2.

Articles in use with different claes of noun: articles in use with the proper noun, articles in use with the common noun and other use of articles;

3.

Some phrases applied with definite, indefinite and zero articles: phrases with zero articles as at anchor, in force, out of hand etc, phrases with definite articles as for the time being, on the spot, in the long run, etc, and examples with indefinite articles as before person‘s names, or before the non-finite element, etc.

Lecture 7 Determiners (ii) --- articles In the previous lecture we touched upon the fact that articles are the most typical of determiners.Now we will concentrate on this topic.English has two articles: the definite and the indefinite article.As we know, all English common nouns have article contrast, so with plural count nouns and noncount nouns, the absence of an article signals the presence of another kind of article--- the zero article.It is in this sense that we may also say that English has three articles --- the definite, the indefinite, and the zero articles.7.1 generic and specific references In discuing the use of article, we must distinguish between generic and specific reference.generic reference When we say the reference is generic, we are talking about any membe4r representative of a cla of people of things. All the three forms of article can be used generically to refer to members of a cla as a whole.

In certain contexts, the definite article followed by a singular count noun often performs a generic function.The same function can also be performed by the definite article combining with certain adjectives or adjectival participles.Generic reference can also be denoted by the indefinite article followed by a singular count noun. This is especially common in giving definitions. In so doing, we can also use plural and noncount nouns without the presence of any determiner. This may be referred to as the generic use of the zero article.specific reference Specific reference is different from generic reference in that it does not refer to a cla of people or things in general but to a particular specimen of the cla.Specific reference falls into two kinds: definite specific reference and indefinite specific reference.

Definite specific reference implies that a person or an object can be identified uniquely in the context or according to the common knowledge shared by speaker and hearer.The definite article is most frequently used in this sense.In the case of indefinite specific reference the person or thing referred to is also a specific object, but is not definitely identified.This kind of referential meaning is most commonly expreed by the indefinite article.In certain contexts and situations the zero article can perform the same function.anaphoric, anaphoric and situational reference Definite specific reference can be anaphoric, anaphoric, or situational.The word anaphoric means ―pointing backward‖.When what is referred to occurs in a previous context and the definite article has to point backward for its meaning, this is known as ―anaphoric reference‖.The anaphoric use of the definite article is called ―anaphoric THE‖.

Anaphoric reference is also a kind of definite specific reference.The word means ―pointing forward‖. When the referential meaning of the definite article is determined by what follows the articles and the head, and the article has to point forward for its own interpretation, that is anaphoric reference. Situational reference is a kind of definite specific reference that depends not on any referent that has occurred in the context but solely on the common knowledge shred by speaker and hearer on a specific situation in which the reference is made clear.Situational reference is most commonly denoted by the definite article, but in certain situations the same function can also be performed by zero.

Leon 8 & 9 Pronouns (I, II)

教学重点及难点：

1.Pronouns concord in number, gender and case; 2.The usage of personal pronouns, reflexive pronouns, and demonstrative pronouns.

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Pronouns concord in number, gender and case.In number: pronoun concord with every-,some-, any- compounds as antecedent, with coordinate construction as antecedent, with collective nouns antecedent, and with ―plural noun/ pronoun +each‖ as antecedent.In gender, Pronoun concord with male/female noun as antecedent, with common gender noun as antecedent, and with neutral gender noun as antecedent, etc;

2.

Choice of pronoun forms: choice between subjective and objective case, choice between adjective and genitive case;

3.

Poeive pronoun, reflexive pronoun, and generic use of personal pronouns;

4.

Pronoun reference: anaphoric, cataphoric, situational reference, personal reference, and demonstrative reference.

Teaching Contents 8.1 Pronoun concord in number 8.2 Pronoun concord in gender 8.3 Pronoun concord in person

Pronouns are a varied closed-cla words with nominal function. English has a developed pronoun system, comprising:

1.personal pronouns 2.poeive pronouns 3.reflexive pronouns 4.reciprocal pronouns 5.demonstrative pronouns 6.interrogative pronouns 7.relative pronouns 8.indefinite pronouns 8.1 Pronoun concord in number Personal pronouns, poeive pronouns, reflexive pronouns, and corresponding determiners have their singular and plural forms.

The number contrast of pronouns differs from that of nouns in that pronoun number contrast is morphologically unrelated, as in I/we, he/they, as opposed to the typical regular formation of noun plurals: boy/boys.The choice of pronoun number forms is generally determined by the number of its antecedent, that is, a pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number.---They haven‘t yet made up their own mind.

1) Pronoun concord with every-, some-, any-compounds as antecedent:

everyone, everybody, someone, somebody, anyone, anybody, no one, nobody,

take the singular form (grammatical) ---Everybody looked after himself.---Nobody wants to go there, does he? In informal style, the plural form, esp.everyone or everybody: ---Everybody knows what they have to do.everything, something, anything, nothing: singular ---Everything is ready, isn‘t?

2) Pronoun concord with coordinate construction as antecedent (notional concord) ---I bought bread and butter at the shop, and they cost 50c.---She likes bread and butter, but this is too thick.

3) Pronoun concord with collective noun as antecedent (notional concord) ---The government is doing its best to boost production.---The government have discued the matter for a long time but they have shown no sign of reaching an agreement.

4) Pronoun concord with ―plural noun / pronoun + each‖ as antecedent

The choice of the number forms of the pronoun and corresponding determiner depends on the position of the appositive ―each‖: before the verb---plural form;

after the verb--- singular form ---We each are accountable for our own families.---We are each responsible for his own family.8.2 Pronoun concord in gender Gender is a grammatical category.It is a set of grammatical forms of nouns, determiners and adjectives that tell of the distinctions of sex.English nouns have four genders: masculine (man), feminine (woman), neutral (book) and common (student).But we do not mean any overt grammatical forms that show the distinctions of sex, but the differences of natural sex denoted by the lexical meaning of nouns.

1) Pronoun concord with male / female noun as antecedent ---When Paul met Mary, he asked her to go to town.2) Pronoun concord with common gender noun as antecedent Some common gender nouns, such as doctor, teacher, engineer, lawyer, parent, student…… they can either be male or female.When they are used in the singular for generic

reference, these nouns are generally referred to as HE, a kind of practice that is opposed by feminists.

---If a person breaks the law, he will be punished.

---The parent of a teenage child often wonders where he went wrong.---Parents of teenage children often wonder where they went wrong.(plural form) --- When a customer calls, ask him to leave his phone number.--- When a customer calls, be sure to ask for a phone number.(No pronoun or determiner is used.) In formal writing as in legal documents, ―he or she‖, ―his or her‖ can also be used.--- The parent of a teenage child often wonders where he or she went wrong.

(2) Some common gender nouns such as baby, infant, and child are intermediate between personal and non-personal.When the speaker does not know , or is not interested in the sex of the baby or infant, he may use the neutral IT: --- The baby was sleeping in its cot.But if the speaker is the baby‘s mother, she is unlikely to refer to her baby as IT: ---Watch out! The baby is trying to put the toy watch into his mouth.

3) Pronoun concord with neutral gender noun as antecedent When the antecedent is a singular noun of neutral gender, a noun denoting an inanimate or non-personal object, the neutral pronoun or the corresponding determiner is generally used.(it / itself / its) ---That book has lost its cover.I will put a new one on it.(2) Just as a baby may be designated it, so a number of nonhuman species may be designated he or she.( car, ship) ---The car needs some petrol.Let‘s fill her / him up at the next garage.

(3) When the antecedent is an animal noun, it is generally referred to as it in nonexpert contexts.If the anima is spoken of with emotion or is personified, it may be referred to as he or she.--- The cat is a useful animal because it eats rats.--- The cat leaped onto my bed and coiled herself there.This is also true of the names of celestial bodies or abstract ideas: sun, moon, earth, nature, history, war, death ---The sun is shining in all his splendid beauty.--- Nature, the greatest artist, makes her common flowers in the common view.

(4) Names of countries may be treated either as feminine or neutral.When used as geographical units, they are treated as inanimate and therefore neutral: ---China is in East Asia.It is one of the largest countries in the world.If used as political or economic units, the names of countries are often feminine, she or her is generally used: ---China has a history of over 5000 years.She is proud of her culture.

8.3 Pronoun concord in person By pronoun concord in person, we mean two things: Pronoun concord in person on sentential level In a sentence, the person of a pronoun is determined by the person of its antecedent.---My brother has sold his car.

If the antecedent is a coordinate construction containing a first or second person pronoun, the referring pronoun should be first and second person in plural number.---My friend and I are reading the manuscript.We‘ll be through in half an hour.---You and the accountant are familiar with him.You can both see him.

2) Pronoun concord in person on textual level In a text pronouns should be consistent in person from beginning to end.This is a matter of speaking or writing from what point of view, from the speaker‘s or writer‘s point of view or from that of a third party.A consistent point of view is a guarantee of clarity in writing.

Teaching Contents 9.1 Choice of pronoun case forms

9.2 Reflexive pronouns

9.3 Pronoun reference 9.1 Choice of pronoun case forms

9.2 Reflexive pronouns

9.3 Pronoun reference Pronoun reference is a kind of reference realized through the use of pronouns.When a pronoun is used it must refer to somebody or something.What is referred to is called antecedent.It is the antecedent that indicates the referential meaning of the pronoun.anaphoric, cataphoric and situational reference According to the relative position of the antecedent, pronoun reference can be anaphoric or cataphoric.

When the antecedent occurs before the pronoun, which has to point backward for its own interpretation, that is anaphoric reference.---John has moved to a new house.He had it built last year.If the antecedent appears after the pronoun, and the pronoun has to point forward for its meaning, that is cataphoric reference.---When she has finished her work, Mary left the office.

If the antecedent does not occur anywhere in a linguistic context, and the pronoun only refers to somebody or something indicated by an extra linguistic situation in which the utterance is given, that is situational reference.--- How hard he studies English.When a pronoun is used, it can only refer to one antecedent.If a pronoun has two or more poible antecedents, that will lead to ambiguity.---He introduced me to the pilot who had looked after him when he was in hospital.--- He introduced me to the pilot whom he had looked after in the hospital…

2) Personal reference Personal reference is established by personal pronouns, poeive pronouns, reflexive pronouns, and corresponding determiners.Personal reference is generally anaphoric.It may occur within the sentence boundary or acro sentences.--- When Mary has finished her work, she left the office.--- John has moved to a new house.He had it built last year.

Personal reference can also be cataphoric, but under limited conditions.Generally speaking, cataphoric personal pronouns usually occur in subordinate constructions, and where cataphoric reference occurs, anaphoric reference canbe used instead, but not conversely.---When she had finished her work, Mary left the office.(cataphoric) ---When Mary had finished her work, she left the office.(anaphoric) ---Mary bought a new dre, but she didn‘t like it.---She bought a new dre, but Mary didn‘t like it.

3) Demonstrative reference Demonstrative reference is established by demonstrative pronouns and demonstrative determiners.All the demonstratives can be freely used in anaphoric reference.---The man gad been drinking too much; this explain his unsteady walk.A: I like the polar bears.These are my favorites.B: Those are my favorites too.--- Our daughter got a bad sun-burn yesterday.That‘s why we couldn‘t come.

As for cataphoric demonstratives, they are restricted to this and these, which are commonly used to refer to a following clause or sentence or a group of sentences.--- ―The great difficulty is this,‖ said the psychologist, ―you can move about in all directions of space, but you can‘t move about in time.‖

―That‖ and ―these‖ are rarely used cataphorically.When occasionally so used, they often take on sarcastic meanings.---How do you like that? He stabs you in the back and then profees to be your friend.

Leon 10 Verb and verb phrase

教学重点及难点：

1.The difference between finite and non-finite verb;

2.The claifications and usage of some phrasal verbs

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Claification of verbs.According to different standards, verbs and verb phrases may falls into six types grammatically, semantically: Main verbs and auxiliaries, transitive verbs, intransitive verbs and linking verbs, dynamic verbs and stative verbs, single-word verbs and phrasal verbs, finite and non-finite verbs, regular and irregular verbs;

2.

A survey of tense, aspect, voice and mood: tense and aspect, active and paive voice, finite and non-finite phrases.

3.

The claifications and usage of some phrasal verbs: V.+ Prep, V.+ adverb particle, V.+ adverb particle + prep.The usage of phrasal verbs as pride oneself on, take pride in and be proud of, etc.

Lecture 10 Verb and Verb Phrase Teaching Contents 10.1 Claification of verbs (I) 10.2 Claification of verbs (II) 10.3 A survey of tense, aspect, voice and mood

10.1 Claification of verbs (I) 1) Main verbs and auxiliaries

According to different roles played in the formation of verb phrases verbs are divided into two claes: main verbs and auxiliaries.As we know, a verb phrase may consist of a main verb only; this is called a simple verb phrase.

A verb phrase may also take the form of a verb preceded by one or more auxiliaries; this is called a complex verb phrase.Main verbs are also called notional verbs functioning as the head and indicating the basic meaning of a verb phrase.

Auxiliaries fall into three categories: primary auxiliaries, modal auxiliaries and semi-auxiliaries.a) Primary auxiliaries: be, do, have.Without lexical meanings of their own, these auxiliaries have only grammatical functions or grammatical meanings.

Be is usually used to help the main verb to form the progreive aspect or the expreive voice.

Auxiliary do is used to help the main verb to expre negative meanings or to form question, and sometimes to help expre the emphatic affirmative.The function of auxiliary have is to help the main verb to form the perfective or the perfective progreive aspect.b) Modal auxiliaries: can/could, may/might, will/would, shall/should, must, ought to, dare, need, used to.

They expre modal meanings.In a finite verb phrase, we can use only one modal auxiliary which is invariably followed by the bare infinitive or the base form.c) Semi-auxiliaries: have to, seem to.They can help the main verb to form the complex verb phrase and expre the modal meaning on the one hand, and can, when preceded by other auxiliaries, function as main verbs on the other.

2) Transitive verbs, intransitive verbs and linking verbs Verbs are divided in accordance with whether or not they must be followed by obligatory elements functioning as complementation and what kind of elements that must follow.a) Transitive verbs must be followed by an object.Some are followed by two objects, i.e.indirect object and direct object;.

some by an object and an object complement; some by an object and an obligatory adverbial b) Intransitive verbs do not require an object.

c) Linking verbs are followed by a subject complement.3) Dynamic and stative verbs a) Dynamic verbs refer to actions.They can be subclaified into three categories:

durative verbs, transitional verbs and momentary verbs.

b) Stative verbs refer to present or past states, i.e.to a relatively stable state of affairs.They are normally incompatible with the progreive except in certain cases where there is a transfer of meaning.They can be claified into four categories.

The first includes main verbs ―be‖ and ―have‖.

The second includes verbs that include, as part of their meaning, the notion of being and having, such as apply to, belong to, differ from, cost, weigh, measure.The third includes verbs that refer to a sense perception, such as hear, see, feel, taste, smell.

The fourth subcla includes verbs that refer to a feeling, a state of mind or an opinion, such as aume, believe, consider, detest, wish.

Stative verbs are not used in progreive aspect, otherwise, they will be changed into dynamic verbs, such as be, have.

e.g.He is being foolish (=is acting foolishly).

We‘re having a wonderful time (= are enjoying ourselves).

The verbs resemble and cost are stative verbs when they are used to mean respectively ―be like‖ and ―be worth‖, but when used in other meanings, these two verbs just like dynamic verbs can occur in the progreive.e.g.He resembles his father.

He is resembling his father (= is becoming more and more like his father) as the years go by.

Perception verbs when used in a non-volitional sense are stative verb, but when used in a volitional sense are dynamic verbs.

e.g.I can taste pepper in it. I‘m tasting this soup.

Attitudinal verbs such as think, imagine, understand are stative verbs, but they can occasionally be used dynamically to expre different meanings, e.g. Be quiet.I‘m thinking (= giving thought to a problem).

There are also cases of a special polite use of the progreive with verbs like want, hope, wonder.e.g.Were you wanting to see me? 10.2 Claification of verbs (II) According to word formation and grammatical form, English verb may be divided into single-verbs and phrasal verbs, finite verbs and non-finite verb, regular verbs and irregular verbs.

4) Single-word verbs and phrasal verbs

A phrasal verb is a verb that is composed of two or more words.They can be claified into three categories: a) Verb + preposition e.g.The police are looking into the case.b) Verb + adverb particle e.g.The meeting has been called off.c) Verb + adverb particle + preposition e.g.I don‘t want to come down with the flu again.

Phrasal verbs are verbal idioms which are equivalent to single-word verbs, transitive or intransitive, and which are different from simple verbal combination where the meanings are easily gueed from the parts.Some constructions such as verb + noun + preposition and verb + noun are also grouped under the category of phrasal verbs e.g.She soon realized that she was being made fun of .

5) Finite and non-finite verbs Finite main verbs have tow finite forms and three non-finite forms.The two are the present tense and the past tense; the three are the infinitive, the –ing participle and the –ed participle.Finite verbs are marked for tense, and non-finite verbs have no tense distinctions.

Most auxiliaries have the present and past tense forms but not all the three non-finite forms except for the primary auxiliary be.The modals do not have the non-finite forms or the base.6) Regular and irregular verbs Verbs whose past tense and –ed participle forms are derived by adding –ed are regular verbs, and otherwise they are irregular verbs.10.3 A survey of tense, aspect, voice and mood 1) Tense and aspect

Tense is a grammatical form aociated with verbs that tells of the distinctions of time; that is, tense and time are related and different.Time is a universal concept with three divisions: past, present and future times.

The notion of time is common to all mankind, when expreed linguistically, it is tense.Chinese is not an inflectional language and has its own ways to expre tense. Aspect is also a kind of verb form which represents the action or the proce expreed by the verb as something going on or completed at a given time.English has two aspects: the progreive and the perfective aspects.

The uses of tense and aspect Tense:

present

past Aspect: progreive

perfective 1.A tense can be used independently:

1) simple present, 2) simple past 2.A tense can be combined with an aspect:

3) present progreive, 4) past progreive

5) present perfective, 6) past perfective 3.A tense can be combined with two aspects:

7) Present perfective progreive

8) Past perfective progreive

2) Active voice and paive voice

Voice is a grammatical category, showing whether the subject of a sentence acts or is acted on.English has two voices: the active and paive voices.When the subject is the agent or doer of an action, the verb takes the active voice; if the subject is the recipient of the action, the verb takes the paive voice and the sentence is called paive sentence.

The paive voice is formed by the auxiliary be + -ed participle of the transitive verb.Since be can take different forms of tense and aspect, we have six paive forms: the simple present, the simple past, the present progreive, the past progreive, the present perfective and the past perfective.Of the three non-finite form, the infinitive and the –ing participle can occur in the paive, simple and perfective.

―Modal auxiliary / semi-auxiliary + infinitive‖ are made paive by using a paive infinitive, which may occur in the simple or in the perfective form.When the paive is formed by get + -ed participle, it is called get-paive, distinguished from be-paive.But get isn‘t an auxiliary and cannot be used as operator in a negative statement or in a question.

Get-paive usually used to denote sudden and unexpected happenings in contexts initiated by such expreions as ―in the end, eventually, at last‖. 3) Indicative, imperative and subjunctive mood Mood, as a grammatical category, is a finite verb form that indicates whether an utterance exprees a fact (indicative mood), a command or request (imperative mood), or a non-fact and hypothesis (subjunctive mood)

4) Finite and non-finite verb phrases Depending on whether the first element in a verb phrase is finite or non-finite, a distinction is made between finite verb phrases and non-finite verb phrases.

Leon 11 Tense and aspect (I) 教学重点及难点：

1.

The difference between the present perfect and the present perfect progreive;

2.

The use of simple present, the present progreive, and present perfect

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Use of simple present.The simple present can be used to denote: timele present, habitual present, momentary and instantaneous present, simple present referring to the future, simple present referring to the past;

2.

Use of present Progreive.The present progreive has the following uses: to denote an action in progre at the moment of speaking, an action in progre at a period of time including the present, a future happening according to a definite plan or arrangement and other meanings;

3.

The two chief uses of the present perfective/progreive and how the present perfective/progreive distinguished in meaning from the simple past.

Lecture 11 Tense and Aspect (I) In this and the next five lectures we are going to deal with features of tense, aspect, voice and mood expreed by the verb phrase.We will start with uses of the simple present, the simple past, the present progreive and the past progreive.11.1 Uses of simple present The simple present is the present tense form which is not accompanied by the category of aspect, that is , which is not marked for the progreive or the perfective aspect.The simple present can be used to denote the following meanings with greater restrictions on verbs:

Timele present

The most common use of the simple present is found in the expreion of eternal truths and proverbs, as well as in scientific, mathematical, geographical and other statements made for all time.

This use of the simple present mostly applies to stative verbs, eg:

Honesty is the best policy.A rolling stone gathers no mo.London stands on the River Thames.

Habitual present

A second use of the simple present, that of habitual or recurrent use, is typically aociated with dynamic verbs, eg:

Percy often goes to his office by underground.Father doesn‘t smoke.

Momentary and instantaneous present

The simple present can also be used to denote a momentary phenomenon that exists at the time of speaking.This phenomenon usually has some duration and therefore is mostly aociated with stative verbs, eg:

What‘s the matter with you? What do you think, Jane?

A le common use. The simple present can be used to imply that the event takes place singly and once-for-all within the moment of speaking. Unlike momentary present, this kind of happening has little or no duration and therefore is confined to dynamic verbs denoting short actions.The use of the instantaneous present is rather restricted, occurring normally in certain speech situations such as radio and television commentaries of fast-moving sports, the running commentary of conjurors and demonstrators, and some formal declarations, eg: (page184)

Simple present referring to the future

The simple present can also be used to denote future time.

This use is limited to future events conceived of as ―certain‖, either because they are determined in advance by calendar of timetable, or because they are part of a plan or an arrangement thought of as unalterable.

This kind of future expreion will be elaborated on in lecture 13.

In the present lecture, we will just mention some subclauses in which the simple present is commonly used in the future sense.

These subclauses include the that-clause following ―I hope‖, ―I bet‖, etc; the that-clause following such constructions as ―see to it‖, ―make sure‖, ―make certain‖; and the conditional / temporal clauses introduced by if /when, eg: I hope you have a good time.I bet it rains tomorrow.I‘ll see (to it)/ make sure/ make certain (that) you don‘t get lost.

Simple present referring to the past

In addition to the meanings discued above, the simple present can occasionally be used to denote past time.

This use of the simple present is usually found with ―communication verbs‖ such as tell, say, hear, learn, and write to expre the present effect of information received in the past, eg:

Alice tells me you‘re entering college next year.I hear poor old Mrs.Smith has lost her son.

Simple present is also used as a device of story-telling and news reporting to add vividne to the description.

This use of the simple present to refer to the past is what we call ―historic present‖, eg:

…I was just dozing off in front of the television when my wife rushes in shouting that the kitchen is on fire.

11.2 Uses of simple past

The simple past is the past tense form which is not marked for the progreive or the perfective aspect.

This tense form can be used to denote the following meanings:

Past event and past habit

The basic use of the simple past is to denote a simple event or state that happened or existed at a definite point or period of time in the past.

This is what we call the event/state past, eg:

He left ten minutes ago.This town was once a beauty spot.

The simple past can also be used to denote a habitual or recurrent action in the past, known as the habitual past, eg: In those days they sowed wheat by hand.He worked in a bank all his life.

Neither the event/state pas nor the habitual past has any connection with the present moment, so what is denoted by the simple past must be something no longer existent at the moment of speaking.Compare: His father was an English teacher all his life.(―He is now dead.‖) His father has been an English teacher all his life.(―He is still alive.‖)

Attitudinal and hypothetical past

In specific contexts, the simple past can also denote the present or the future time.

There are two uses. One is known as the attitudinal past, that is , the past tense is aociated with the present time in independent clauses expreing a question, request or suggestion. Its effect is to make the question / request/suggestion le direct, implying a polite, somewhat tentative attitude on the part of the speaker, eg:

A: Did you want me? B: Yes, I wondered if you could give me some help.

The other is what we call the hypothetical past. In this use, the simple past refers not to a fact but to a non-fact, and is typically found in that-clause following such constructions as ―It‘s time…‖, ―I wish…‖, ― I‘d rather…‖, etc., and in adverbial clauses of rejected condition, i.e.a condition which is not likely to be fulfilled, eg:

It‘s time you had a holiday.I wish you lived closer to us.I‘d rather you went now.

If I had the money now, I‘d buy a car.

11.3 Uses of present progreive

The present progreive (am/is/are+-ing participle) has the following uses:

To denote an action in progre at the moment of speaking

To denote what is going on at the present moment, we commonly use the present progreive, generally aociated with durative dynamic verbs, eg:

A: What are you doing? B: I‘m writing a letter.

The difference between the simple present and the present progreive referring to present time is that the former carries a permanent meaning and the latter a temporary meaning.Compare:

He lives in shanghai (permanent residence) He is now living in Shanghai.(temporary residence)

To denote an action in progre at a period of time including the present

The present progreive can also expre an action that is gong on over a period of time including the present but not necearily at the moment of speaking, that is, a temporary habit as distinguished from the permanent habit denoted by the simple present.

Compare:

He works in a chemical factory.He is working in a chemical factory these days.

Note that the present progreive when accompanied by an adverbial of frequency such as always, continually, constantly, or forever often imparts an emotional coloring, often of annoyance or disapproval.

By contrast, the simple present lacks the subjective, emotional tone of the present progreive and states a fact objectively.

Compare: She complains about the house.She is constantly complaining about the house .To denote a future happening according to a definite plan or arrangement

The present progreive used to refer to the future, more often than not the near rather than distant future, in connection with a definite plan, arrangement of program, usually occurs in situations with obvious future reference, eg:

Mr.Cameron is leaving China in a few weeks.I‘m going to Qingdao for the summer holiday.

The present progreive denoting futurity also occurs in temporal and conditional clauses, on condition that there is future reference in the main clause, eg.:

I‘ll think about it while you‘re writing the report.If you are standing at the corner, I‘ll give you a lift.

To denote other meanings

Apart from the above-mentioned meanings, the present progreive may also be used to denote an action in the immediate past which is generally expreed by communication verbs such as tell, talk, say, exaggerate, etc, eg: You don‘t believe it? You know I‘m telling the truth.

I don‘t know what you are talking about.

The present progreive may also be used to make even politer requests than does the attitudinal past with such few verbs as hope, wonder dealt with in 11,2.2, eg:

I‘m hoping you‘ll give us some advice.

I‘m wondering if I may have a word with you.

As mentioned before, the present progreive is commonly aociated with durative dynamic verbs.

With momentary verbs, i.e.verbs denoting actions of very short duration, the use of the present progreive will be understood to expre repetition or a series of momentary actions, rather than just a single action.

11.4 Uses of past progreive

The use of the past progreive (was/were+ -ing participle)has much in common with that of the present progreive, only the time reference being pushed back to the past, often overtly expreed by a time-when adverbial.

The following are the uses of the past progreive.

To denote an action in progre at a definite point or period of past time

This is the most common use of the past progreive.

In this use, the past time reference is usually indicated by a temporal adverbial or implied by the context.

In the past progreive, the notion of incompletene is more clearly indicated than in the present progreive, eg:

What were you doing yesterday at seven p.m.? They were building a dam last winter.

It is based on this use that the past progreive may have the effect of surrounding a particular event by a temporal frame, or serve, at the beginning of a text, as the background in past time narrative, eg:

The students were still laughing when the teacher stepped in.

To denote a past habitual action

The habitual action denoted by the past progreive is most clearly characterized by its temporarine, in contrast with the past habit denoted by the simple past, eg:

George was getting up at five every day that week.

As in the case of the present progreive, the past progreive can also collocate with such adverbials of frequency as always, constantly, continually, forever, to expre emotional feelings, especially feelings of annoyance or disapproval on the part of the speaker, eg:

My brother was always losing his keys.

To denote futurity in the past

In specific contexts, the past progreive can be used to denote a future action in the past according to a definite plan or arrangement.

This use is also found in some adverbial clauses of time or condition, eg:

They were leaving a few days later.He told me to wake him up if he was sleeping.

To make polite requests and expre hypothetical meanings

The past progreive has a similar function to that of the simple past and of the present progreive as described in 11.2.2 and 11.3.4.

Of the three forms, the past progreive is the most tentative in making polite requests.Compare: I hope you can send me some books.I hoped that you could send me some books.I am hoping you can send me some books.I was hoping you could send me some books.

To expre hypothetical meanings, the past progreive only occurs in certain conditional clauses and in subclauses after ―I wish‖, ―I‘d rather‖, ―it‘s time‖, etc:

I wish they were not talking so loudly.I‘d rather you were going at once.

Would you stay a little longer, if you were enjoying yourself? If they were leaving tonight, I‘d like to go with them.It is time we were leaving.

Contrast between past progreive and simple past

In the previous sections we have touched upon notional differences between the simple past and the past progreive.

There are a few more points to note.

To denote an action in completion, we use the simple past; to denote an action in progre, we use the past progreive.To state a mere past fact, we use the simple past; to lay emphasis on the duration of the action, we use the past progreive.When two actions co-occur in a sentence, the action of shorter duration is to be denoted by the simple past, while that of longer duration by the past progreive.In colloquial speech, the past progreive is sometimes used to show what one says is casual, unimportant and aimle, whereas the use of the simple past means differently.Compare: I was talking to Margaret the other day.I talked to Margaret the other day.

Compare the time sequence of the two actions in the following sentences:

When we arrived, she was making some fresh coffee.When we arrived, she made some fresh coffee.

In the first sentence, the action of making coffee was already in progre when we arrived, whereas in the second sentence, the action of making coffee followed our arrival in time sequence.

Leon 12 Tense and aspect (II)

教学重点及难点：

1.

Differences between present/past perfective and present/past perfective progreive.

2.

Perfective aspect and since-clause, perfective aspect vs.have got/have got to.

教 学 基 本 内 容

1.

Present perfective has two chief uses: ―finished‖ use and ―unfinished‖ use.The former refers to the present result of a past event still operative at the present moment, while the latter one denotes that an action or state extends over a period lasting up to the present moment.

2.

Past perfective progreive also has ―finished‖ and ―unfinished‖ use, only with time reference back-shifted to a specified past moment.

3.

There are a few more points that merit our attention concerning the use of the perfective aspect: perfective aspect and since-clause, perfective aspect vs.have got/have got to and perfective aspect in ―It is/will be the first time + that-clause‖.

Lecture 12 Tense and Aspect (II) The perfective aspect can combine with the two tenses, forming present perfective and past perfective, which can again combine with the progreive aspect, resulting in present perfective progreive and past perfective progreive.

12.1 uses of present perfective (progreive)

This section deals with the two chief uses of the present perfective (progreive) and how the present perfective (progreive) is distinguished in meaning from the simple past.

Present perfective

Present perfective, a combination of the perfective aspect with the present tense (have / has+-ed participle), has two chief uses: ―finished‖ use and ―unfinished‖ use.

This ―finished‖ use refers to the present result of a past event still operative at the present moment.

The ―unfinished‖ use of the present perfective denotes that an action or state extends over a period lasting up to the present moment, poibly extending into the future as well.

The difference between these two uses manifests itself in the fact that in the ―unfinished‖ use, the present perfective is commonly accompanied by an adverbial expreing duration, but no such accompanying adverbial is present in the ―finished‖ use.

Compare:

He‘s turned off the light.(―The light is still off now.‖)

He‘s lived here since 1960.(―The period of residence extends either to the present—the usual interpretation—or to some specified date in the past.‖)

Present perfective progreive

The use of the present perfective progreive (have/has been + -ing participle) has much in common with the ―unfinished‖ use of the present perfective.

Compare:

I‘ve been writing letters for an hour (and I‘ve still got some more to do).I‘ve been sitting in the garden (and have just come indoors).

There are cases, however, where these two forms are not interchangeable in that the present perfective progreive has also the meanings of continuousne, temporarine and incompletene.

Compare:

Who‘s been eating my dinner?(―Some of it is left.‖) Who‘s eaten my dinner? (―It‘s all gone.‖)

Contrast between present perfective (progreive) and simple past

As has been pointed out, the action or state denoted by the present perfective (progreive), though referring to some indefinite happening in the past, has some connection with the present.

Hence, if an action or state happened in the past and has no connection with the present, it will have to be expreed by the simple past or the past progreive.

Compare:

His sister has been an invalid all her life .(―she is still alive.‖) His sister was an invalid all her life.(she is now dead.)

12.2.Uses of past perfective (progreive)

Let us now turn to the uses of the past perfective (progreive).

Past perfective

The past perfective also has two chief uses: ―finished‖ use and ―unfinished‖ use, only with time reference back –shifted to a specified past moment.

In the ―finished‖ use, the past perfective denotes an action or state already in completion before a specified past,

and in its ―unfinished‖ use, an action or state extending over a period up to a past moment and poibly into the future in the past, e.g.:

I had written the article when he came.By six o‘clock they had worked twelve hours.

Past perfective progreive

The past perfective progreive is basically similar in use to the present perfective progreive, only with time reference back-shifted to a specified past.The chief use of the past perfective progreive has also something in common with the ―unfinished‖ use of the past perfective, and, therefore, in many cases, these two forms can be used interchangeably, though in colloquial speech, the past perfective progreive is more frequently used than the past perfective.

Compare:

I‘d been working for three hours when he called.I‘d worked for three hour when he called

Past perfective in sentences with when-/ before- /after-/ until- clauses

Subordinators such as when, before, after, until can sometimes be used interchangeably when they connect clauses where two actions happen one after another.

The general rule is that the earlier happenings are expreed by the past perfective and the later happening by the simple past.

Compare:

When I reached the station, the train had already left.I reached the station after the train had left.I didn‘t reach the station until after the train had left.The train had left before I reached the station.

第17篇：初二英语语法

初二英语语法大全

动词时态的句子结构及关键词: 一般现在时:

句子结构: 肯定句 主语+be (am, is, are ) + 其他

否定句 主语+be not +其他

疑问句 Be+主语+其他

或: 肯定句 主语+动词原型+其他 ( 第三人称单数作主语动词要加\"s\" )

否定句 主语+don\'t+动词原型+其他(第三人称单数作主语don\'t改为doesn\'t)

疑问句 DO+主语+动词原型+其他(第三人称单数作主语do改为doe)

关键词: sometimes, often, usually, always, every day, on Sunday

afternoon, at 10 o\'clockin the morning, five days a week, three times a month等.

注:在时间壮语从句,条件壮语从句中,常用一般现在时表示将来时,这时一般从 句用一般现在时,主句用将来时

现在进行时:

句子结构:肯定句 主语+be +动词的现在分词+其他

否定句 主语+be not+动词的现在分词+其他

疑问句 Be +主语+动词的现在分词+其他 关键词:now, right now, at the moment, It\'s+几点钟等的句子.或look, listen, keep quiet等提示语. 一般将来时:

句子结构: 肯定句 主语+will+动词原型+其他

否定句 主语+will not +动词原型+其他

疑问句 Will +主语+动词原型+其他

(will 可改为be going to ,当主语是第一人称时will可用shall) 关键词:tomorrow, tomorrow morning, at seven o\'clock tomorrow evening, next year,

at ten o\'clock next Sunday, this year, at the end of this term, from now on, in the year 2008, soon, in a few days\' time, in the future 等. 一般过去时:

句子结构:肯定句 主语+be(was,were)+其他

否定句 主语+be not+其他

疑问句 Be+主语+其他

或: 肯定句 主语+动词的过去式+其他

否定句 主语+did not+动词原型+其他

疑问句 Did+主语+动词原型+其他

关键词:yesterday,yesterday morning等 ,last week, last year, at the end of last term, 一段时间+ago如:ten years ago, five hours ago, on January 1st,2004, in the 1980s等.

Just now,in the old days, long ago, a moment ago等. 过去进行时:

句子结构: 肯定句 主语+was/were+动词的现在分词+其他

否定句 主语+was/were not +动词的现在分词+其他

疑问句 Was/Were + 主语+ 动词的现在分词+其他

关键词:具体时间+过去的时间壮语 如:at ten o\'clock yesterday morning, at

this time last Sunday等. 现在完成时:

句子结构:肯定句 主语+have/has+动词的过去分词+其他(第三人称单数用has)

否定句 主语+have/has not+动词的过去分词+其他

疑问句 Have/Has + 主语 + 动词的过去分词+其他

关键词:already, yet, just, ever, never ,so far, for +一段时间,since+过去的

时间或过去时从句.或this year alone\"今年以来\",these five years alone\"这五年

以来\",in the last ten years \"在过去的十年中\"等. 过去将来时: 句子结构: 肯定句 主语+ would+ 动词原型+其他

否定句 主语+ would not + 动词原型+ 其他

疑问句 Would+主语+动词原型+其他

(would可改为was/were going to ,主语第一人称时would可用should)

过去将来时主要用在宾语从句中. 过去完成时:

句子结构: 肯定句 主语+had + 动词的过去分词+其他

否定句 主语+had not +动词的过去分词+其他

疑问句 Had+主语+动词的过去分词+其他

关键词:by+过去某一时间点 如:by last year, by the end of+过去某一时间点 如:

by the end of last year, before+过去某一时间点,by the time +从句,或宾语从 句中最后,请记住:

It\'s not the end of the world, try to look on the bright side of thing, I\'m sure it will be all right.

这不是世界末日,试着往事情好的方面看,我确认一切都会好起来.英语动词有两种语态：主动语态和被动语态。初中阶段的被动语态有五种时态，我们可以从以下方面进行小结：

一、被动语态的时态及结构（以动词do为例） 结构：主语 + be + 过去分词

时态：1.一般现在时： am (is, are) done.2.带情态动词的被动语态：must (can, may, should, need, would) be done 3.一般过去时： was (were) done * 4.一般将来时： will (shall) be done * 5.现在进行时： am (is, are) being done 6.现在完成时： have (has) been done

二、从初中阶段所学五种基本句型谈变被动语态时应注意的问题。1．主语 + 连系动词 + 表语 (S+V+P) 此结构不可用被动语态。 (正) The flowers smell sweet.(误) The flowers are smelt sweet.2．主语 + 不及物动词 (S+V) 此结构不可变被动语态。

(正) An accident happened last night.(误) An accident was happened last night.3．主语 + 及物动词 + 宾语 (S + V+ O) （1）将主动语态的宾语变为被动语态的主语 Children often sing this song This song is often sung by children.（2）将含有介词或副词的动词短语变为被动结构时，不可将介词或副词去掉。

We should listen to the teachers carefully.The teachers should be listened to carefully.4．主语 + 及物动词 + 间接宾语 + 直接宾语 (S + V+ IO+ DO) （1）.将表人的间接宾语变为主语，直接宾语不变。 He showed us a picture .We were shown a picture.（2）.将指物的直接宾语变为主语，要在间接宾语前加介词to或for.常用加to的动词give, show, pa, read等 常用加for的动词 buy, get, make, sing, draw 等 A picture was shown to us.A dictionary was bought for me by my parents.5． 主语+及物动词 + 宾语 + 宾语补足语 (S+ V+ O + C) 如动词为 make, see, hear, watch 等，后接宾语补足语为不带“to”不定式时，变被动语态时要加上“to” 。 I saw him fall off the tree.He was seen to fall off the tree.6.\"be + 过去分词\" 并非都是被动语态，系动词 be, feel, seem,look,等词后面的过去分词已转化为形容词，作表语用，表示某种状态。

I\'m interested in mathematics.我对数学感兴趣。

*7.某些动词用主动语态来表示被动含义。The woman\'s clothes sell well.女装卖的快。This book sells best.这本书很畅销.

英语语法大全下载

1、所有格：He is Fred\'s best friend.（-\'s）

2、动词现在时的第三人称单数：Alfredo works.（-s）

3、动词过去式：Fred worked.（-ed），但亦有不规则变化。

4、现在分词／进行时态：Fred is working.（-ing）（［注］如果动词的末音节为辅音结尾的闭音节，则须双写末辅音，如running）

5、过去分词：The car was stolen.（-en）；Fred has talked to the police.（-ed），但亦有不规则变化。

6、动名词：Working is good for the soul.（-ing）

7、名词的复数：Fred has two blue eyes.（-s）（［注］如果动词的尾字是s,sh,x,ch，则需加-es，如dishes）

8、形容词的比较级：Fred is smarter than Rick.（-er）形容词末尾加-er，多音节在前面”加more，如\"more difficult\"。

9、形容词的最高级：Fred has the fastest car.（-est）形容词末尾加-est，多音节词在前面加most，如\"the most difficult\"。

英语的基本语序为SVO，且基本上不能任意变换语序，除了在少数诗词以外；另一方面，有时英语会使用OSV的语序。（注：S：Subject［主语］；V：Verbal phrase［谓语］；O：Object［宾语］）

英语中所有的词可分成十大类，每一类词在句子中都有其特定的位置和作用。这十大词类是：

一、名 词：表示人或事物的名称的词。

二、形容词：表示人或事物的特征的词。

三、副 词：修饰动词、形容词和副词的词。

四、代 词：是代替名词、形容词和数词的词。

五、数 词：表示数量和顺序的词。

六、动 词：表示动作和状态的词。

七、冠 词：与名词连用，其说明人或事物的作用。

八、介 词：通常置于名词和代词之前，表示名词和代词与其他词的关系。

九、连 词：连接词与词、短语与短语、句子与句子的词。

十、感叹词：表示说话人感情或语气的词。

英语的时态

英语共有十六个时态、四个体。（注：四个体为——一般、进行、完成、完成进行。）

英语中的四个体相当于法语、西班牙语以及所有印欧语系罗曼语族中的式，如：直陈式，命令式等。

（1）一般现在时

基本形式（以do为例）：

第三人称单数：does（主语为非第三人称单数）；

肯定句：主语＋动词原形＋其他；

否定句：主语＋don„t＋动词原形＋其他；

一般疑问句：Do＋主语＋动词原形＋其他。

肯定回答：Yes，＋ 主语＋do．

否定回答：No，＋主语＋don\'t.

特殊疑问句：疑问词+一般疑问句语序 （2）一般过去时

be动词＋行为动词的过去式

was／were＋not；在行为动词前加didn„t，同时还原行为动词

was或were放于句首；用助动词do的过去式did提问，同时还原行为动词

（3）一般将来时

am／are／is＋going to＋do

will／shall＋do

am/is/are/about to + do

am/is/are to + do

一般将来时的表达方法

be going to +动词原形

be +不定式,be to+动词原形,be about to ＋动词原形

be able to +不定式

be about to+动词原形

(4)过去将来时

be（was，were）going to+动词原形

be（was，were）about to+动词原形

be（was，were）to+动词原形

肯定句：主语+be（was，were）going to+动词原形～.

否定句：主语+be（was，were）not going to+动词原形～.

疑问句：Be（Was，Were）+主语+going to+动词原形～？

肯定句：主语+would（should）+动词原形～.

否定句：主语+would（should）not+动词原形～.

疑问句：Would（Should）+主语+动词原形～？

(5)现在进行时

主语+be+动词ing〔现在分词〕形式

第一人称+am+doing+sth

第二人称+are+doing +sth

第三人称+is+doing+sth (6)过去进行时

肯定句：主语+was/were+doing+其它

否定句：主语+was/were+not+doing+其它

一般疑问句及答语：Was/Were+主语+doing+其它 答语：Yes,I was./No,I wasn\'t.

特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+was/were+主语+doing+其它

(7)将来进行时

动词be的将来时+现在分词

(8)过去将来进行时

should(would)+be+现在分词

(9)现在完成时

基本结构：主语+have/has+过去分词(done)

①肯定句：主语+have/has+过去分词+其他

②否定句：主语+have/has+not+过去分词+其他

③一般疑问句：Have/Has+主语+过去分词+其他

④特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+一般疑问句（have/has+主语+过去分词+其他

(10)过去完成时

基本结构：主语+had+过去分词(done)

①肯定句：主语+had+过去分词+其他

②否定句：主语+had+not+过去分词+其他

③一般疑问句：Had+主语+过去分词+其他

肯定回答：Yes,主语+had

否定回答：No,主语+hadn\'t

④特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+一般疑问句（had+主语+过去分词+其他）

语法判定:

（ 1 ） by + 过去的时间点。如：

I had finished reading the novel by nine o\'clock last night.

（ 2 ） by the end of + 过去的时间点。如：

We had learnt over two thousand English words by the end of last term.

（ 3 ） before + 过去的时间点。如：

They had planted six hundred trees before last Wednesday. (11)将来完成时

（shall）will+have+动词过去分词

before+将来时间或by+将来时间

before或by the time引导的现在时的从句

(12)过去将来完成时

should / would have done sth. (13)现在完成进行时

have/has been +-ing 分词

(14)过去完成进行时

had been +-ing 分词

(15)将来完成进行时

主语+ shall/will have been doing (16)过去将来完成进行时

should+have been+现在分词用于第一人称 would have been+现在分词用于其他人称

第18篇：初一英语语法

初一的语法知识还是比较简单的。 主要掌握几种时态 1，一般现在时 2，一般过去时 3，一般将来时 4，现在进行时 还有几种词 1，名词 2，代词 3，形容词 4，动词 5，冠词

初一英语语法总结--词法

（一）

在学习初一英语语法时，要认真、细心，不要觉得一些地方不重要而得过且过。下面从几个方面，总结出了初一英语语法，如果要复习英语句法的同学，可以参考一下：

一、初一英语语法——词法

1、名词

A）、名词的数

我们知道名词可以分为可数名词和不可数名词，而不可数名词它没有复数形式，但可数名词却有单数和复数之分，复数的构成如下：

一）在后面加s。如：fathers, books, Americans, Germans, apples, bananas

二）x, sh, ch, s, tch后加es。如：boxes, glaes, drees, watches, wishes, faxes

三）以辅音字母加y结尾的变y为i再加es 如：baby-babies, family-families, duty-duties, comedy-comedies, documentary-documentaries, story-stories

以元音字母加y结尾的直接加s。如：day-days, boy-boys, toy-toys, key-keys, ways

四）以o结尾加s（外来词）。如：radios, photos, 但如是辅音加o的加es：如: tomatoes西红柿, potatoes马铃薯

五）以f或fe结尾的变f为v再加es(s)。如：knife-knives, wife-wives, half-halves, shelf-shelves, leaf-leaves, yourself-yourselves

六）单复数相同（不变的）有：fish, sheep, deer鹿子, Chinese, Japanese

七）一般只有复数，没有单数的有：people,pants, shorts, shoes, glaes, gloves, clothes, socks

八）单词形式不变，既可以是单数也可以是复数的有：police警察局，警察, cla班，同学, family家，家庭成员

九）合成的复数一般只加主要名词，多数为后一个单词。如：action movie-action movies, pen pal-pen pals; 但如果是由man或woman所组成的合成词的复数则同时为复数。如：man doctor-men doctors, woman teacher-women teachers

十）有的单复数意思不同。如：fish鱼 fishes鱼的种类, paper纸 papers报纸，卷子，论文, work工作 works作品，工厂, gla玻璃 glaes玻璃杯，眼镜, orange桔子水 oranges橙子, light光线 lights灯, people人 peoples民族, time时间 times时代, 次数, chicken 鸡肉 chickens 小鸡

十一） 单个字母的复数可以有两种形式直接加s或’s。如：Is (I’s), Ks (K’s)。但如是缩略词则只加s。如：IDs, VCDs, SARs

十二） 特殊形式的有：child-children, man-men, woman-women, foot-feet, mouse-mice, policeman-policemen, Englishman-Englishmen

B）名词的格

当我们要表示某人的什么东西或人时，我们就要使用所有格形式。构成如下：

一）单数在后面加’s。如：brother’s, Mike’s, teacher’s

二）复数以s结尾的直接在s后加’，如果不是之s结尾的与单数一样处理。如：Teachers’ Day教师节, clamates’; Children’s Day六一节, Women’s Day三八节

三）由and并列的名词所有时，如果是共同所有同一人或物时，只加最后一个’s，但分别拥有时却分别按单数形式处理。如：Mike and Ben’s room迈克和本的房间（共住一间），Mike’s and Ben’s rooms迈克和本的房间（各自的房间）

初一英语语法总结--词法

（二）

2、代词

项目：人称代词 物主代词 指示代词 反身代词

人称 主格 宾格 形容词 名词性

第一人称

单数 I me my mine myself

复数 we us our ours ourselves

第二人称

单数 you you your yours yourself

复数 you you your yours yourselves

第三人称

单数 she her her hers herself he him his his himself it it its its this that itself

复数 they them their theirs these those themselves

3、动词

A） 第三人称单数

当动词是第三人称单数时，动词应该像名词的单数变动词那样加s，如下：

一）一般在词后加s。如：comes, spells, waits, talks, sees, dances, trains

二）在x, sh, ch, s, tch后加es。如：watches, washes, wishes, finishes

三）1）以辅音字母加y结尾的变y为i再加es。如：study-studies, hurry-hurries, try-tries

2）以元音字母加y结尾的直接加s。如：plays, says, stays, enjoys, buys

四）以o结尾加es。如：does, goes

五）特殊的有：are-is, have-has

B） 现在分词

当我们说某人正在做什么事时，动词要使用分词形式，不能用原形，构成如下：

一）一般在后加ing。如：spell-spelling, sing-singing, see-seeing, train-training, play-playing, hurry-hurrying, watch-watching, go-going, do-doing

二）以不发音e的结尾的去掉e再加ing。如：dance-dancing, wake-waking, take-taking, practice-practicing, write-writing, have-having

三）以重读闭音节结尾且一个元音字母＋一个辅音字母（注意除开字母组合如show –showing, draw-drawing）要双写最后的辅音字母再加ing。如：put-putting, run-running, get-getting, let-letting, begin-beginning

四）以ie结尾的变ie为y再加ing。如：tie-tying系 die-dying死 lie-lying 位于

4、形容词的级

我们在对两个或以上的人或物进行对比时，则要使用比较或最高级形式。构成如下：

一） 一般在词后加er或est(如果是以e结尾则直接加r或st)。如：greater-greatest, shorter –shortest, taller –tallest, longer –longest, nicer- nicest, larger -largest

二）以重读闭音节结尾且1个元音字母＋1个辅音字母(字母组合除外，如few-fewer fewest)结尾的双写结尾的辅音再加er /est。如：big-bigger biggest, red-redder reddest, hot-hotter hottest

三） 以辅音字母＋y结尾的变y为i加er/est。如：happy-happier happiest, sorry-sorrier sorriest, friendly-friendlier friendliest(more friendly most friendly), busy-busier busiest, easy-easier easiest

四）特殊情况：(两好多坏，一少老远)

good/wellmore most bad/ill – worse worst

little- le least old- older/elder oldest/eldest far- farther/further farthest/furthest

5、数词 (基变序，有规则；

一、

二、三，自己背；

五、

八、

九、十二；其它后接th；y结尾，变为i, eth跟上去。) first, second, third; fifth, eighth, ninth, twelfth; seventh, tenth, thirteenth, hundredth; twenty-twentieth, forty-fortieth, ninety-ninetieth 初一英语语法总结--句式

1.陈述句

肯定陈述句

a) This is a book.(be动词)

b) He looks very young.(连系动词)

c) I want a sweat like this.(实义动词)

d) I can bring some things to school.(情态动词)

e) There’s a computer on my desk.(There be结构)

否定陈述句

a) These aren’t their books.b) They don’t look nice.

c) Kate doesn’t go to No.4 Middle School.d) Kate can’t find her doll.e) There isn’t a cat here.(=There’s no cat here.)

2.祈使句

肯定祈使句

a) Please go and ask the man.

b) Let’s learn English!

c) Come in, please.

否定祈使句

a) Don’t be late.

b) Don’t hurry.

3.疑问句

1) 一般疑问句

a) Is Jim a student?

（系动词is提前）

b) Can I help you?

（情态动词Can提前）

c) Does she like salad? （第三人称单数提问）(复数用Do,如d)) d) Do they watch TV? （第三人称复数问句,单数用Does,如c）） 因watch看时及物动词，提问只能加DO。

e)Is she reading?她在读书吗？

Yes,she is.

肯定回答:

a) Yes, he is.

b) Yes, you can.

c) Yes, she does.

d) Yes, they do.

e) Yes, she is.

否定回答:

a) No, he isn’t.

b) No, you can’t.

c) No, she doesn’t.

d) No, they don’t.

e) No, she isn’t.

2) 选择疑问句

Is the table big or small?

回答 It’s big./ It’s small.

3) 特殊疑问句

① 问年龄 How old is Lucy? She is twelve.How old are you? I’m 14.

② 问种类 What kind of movies do you like? I like action movies and comedies.

③ 问身体状况 How is your uncle? He is well/fine.

④ 问方式 How do/can you spell it? L-double O-K.

How do we contact you? My e-mail addre is president@xueersi.com.

⑤ 问原因 Why do you want to join the club?

⑥ 问时间 What’s the time? (=What time is it?) It’s a quarter to ten a.m..

What time do you usually get up, Rick? At five o’clock.

When do you want to go? Let’s go at 7:00.

⑦ 问地方 Where’s my backpack? It’s under the table.

⑧ 问颜色 What color are they? They are light blue.

What’s your favourite color? It’s black.

⑨ 问人物 Who’s that? It’s my sister.

Who is the boy in blue? My brother.

Who isn’t at school? Peter and Emma.

Who are Lisa and Tim talking to?

⑩ 问东西 What’s this/that (in English)? It’s a pencil case.

What else can you see in the picture? I can see some broccoli, strawberries and hamburgers.

11问姓名

What’s your aunt’s name? Her name is Helen./She’s Helen.

What’s your first name? My first name’s Ben.

What’s your family name? My family name’s Smith.

12 问哪一个 Which do you like? I like one in the box.

13 问字母 What letter is it? It’s big D/small f.

14 问价格 How much are these pants? They’re 15 dollars.

15 问电话号码 What’s your phone number? It’s 576-8349.

16 问谓语(动作) What’s he doing? He’s watching TV.

17 问职业(身份) What do you do? I’m a teacher.

What’s your father? He’s a doctor.

初一英语语法总结--时态

1、一般现在时 表示普遍、经常性的或长期性的动作时使用一般现在时，它有：

Be 动词：

She’s a worker.Is she a worker? She isn’t a worker.

情态动词：

I can play the piano.Can you play the piano? I can’t play the piano.行为动词：

They want to eat some tomatoes.Do they want to eat any tomatoes? They don’t want to eat any tomatoes.

Gina has a nice watch.Does Gina have a nice watch? Gina doesn’t have a watch.

2、现在进行时

表示动词在此时正在发生或进行就使用进行时态，结构为sb be v-ing sth + 其它.I’m playing baseball.Are you playing baseball? I’m not playing baseball.

Nancy is writing a letter.Is Nancy writing a letter? Nancy isn’t writing a letter.

They’re listening to the pop music.Are they listening the pop music? They aren’t listening to the pop music.

帮助复习的重点： 一．短语：

1 ．be from = come from 来自于---- 2． live in 居住在--- 3． on weekends 在周末

4 ．write to sb = write a letter to sb 给某人写信；写信给某人 5 ．in the world 在世界上 in China 在中国

6．pen pal 笔友 14 years old 14岁 favorite subject 最喜欢的科目 7．the United States 美国 the United Kingdom 英国 New York 纽约 8．speak English 讲英语 like and dislike 爱憎 9．go to the movies 去看电影 play sports 做运动 二．重点句式：

1 Where’s your pen pal from? = Where does your pen pal from/ 2 Where does he live? (他居住在哪儿)习惯性的。 3 What language(s) does he speak? 4 I want a pen pal in China.5 I can speak English and a little French.6 Please write and tell me about yourself.7 Can you write to me soon? 8 I like going to the movies with my friends and playing sports.三．本单元的国家，人民、语言对应。

1 Canada---- Canadian---- English / French 2 France------ French------French 3 Japan------Japanese----Japanese 4 Australia----Australian----- English 5 the United States------ American---- English 6 the United Kingdom---British----- Enghish

Unit 2 Where’s the post office? 一． Asking ways: (问路) 1． Where is (the nearest) ……？ （最近的）……在哪里？

2． Can you tell me the way to ……？ 你能告诉我去……的路吗？ 3． How can I get to ……？ 我怎样到达……呢？

4． Is there …… near here / in the neighborhood? 附近有……吗？ 5． Which is the way to ……？ 哪条是去……的路？ 二．Showing the ways: （指路）

1.Go straight down / along this street.沿着这条街一直走。 2.Turn left at the second turning.在第二个路口向左转。 3.You will find it on your right.你会在你右手边发现它。

4.It is about one hundred metres from here.离这里大约一百米远。

5.You’d better take a bus.你最好坐公交车去。（You’d better+动词原形） 三．词组

1.acro from …… 在……的对面 acro from the bank 在银行的对面 2.next to…… 紧靠…… next to the supermarket 紧靠超市 3.between……and…… 在……和……之间

between the park and the zoo 在公园和动物园之间 among 表示位于三者或三者以上之间

4.in front of…… 在……前面 There is a tree in front of the claroom.课室前面有棵树。

in the front of…… 在……（内）的前部 There is a desk in the front of the claroom.课室内的前部有张桌子。

5.behind…… 在……后面 behind my house 在我家后面 6.turn left/ right 向左/右拐

on the left/right of…… 在某物的左/右边 on the left of our school 在我们学校的左边

on one’s left/right 在某人的左/右边 on my left 在我左边 7.go straight 一直走

8.down /along…… 沿着……（街道） down/along Center Street 沿着中央街 9.in the neighborhood=near here 在附近10 welcome to…… 欢迎来到…… 11.take /have a walk 散步

12.the beginning of…… ……的开始,前端 at the beginning of…… 在……的开始,前端 in the beginning 起初，一开始

13.have fun=have a good time=enjoy oneself 玩得开心，过得愉快 我昨天玩得很开心。 I had fun yesterday.I had a good time yesterday.I enjoyed myself yesterday.14.have a good trip 旅途愉快 15.take a taxi 坐出租车

16.到达：get to +地方 get here/ there/ home 到这/那/家 arrive in +大地方 I arrive in Beijing.arrive at +小地方 I arrive at the bank.reach +地方

17．go acro 从物体表面横过 go acro the street 横过马路 go through 从空间穿过 go through the forest 穿过树林 18．on + 街道的名称。 Eg: on Center Street at + 具体门牌号+街道的名称 Eg: at 6 Center Street 三．重难点解析

1．enjoy doing sth 享受做某事的乐趣，喜爱做某事 I enjoy reading.我喜爱读书。

到目前为止，我们学了两个特殊的动词finish和enjoy，都是要带 doing.I finish cleaning the room.我扫完了这间屋子。

2．hope to do sth 希望做某事 I hope to pa this exam.我希望通过这次考试。 hope +从句 I hope tomorrow will be fine.我希望明天将会晴朗。

（从句即是一个小句子，这个小句子又放在大句子中，从属于大句子，所以叫从句。如tomorrow will be fine是一个从句，它又放在I hope 的后面，形成句中有句。）

3.if 引导一个表示假设的句子。

If I have much money, I will go to the moon.如果我有许多钱，我就会去月球。 If you are hungry, you can buy some food in the supermarket.如果你饿了的话，你可以在超市买一些食物。 四．本单元的反义词、近义词配对

1new—old 2 quiet--- busy 3 dirty--- clean 4 big---- small

Unit 3 Why do you like koala bears? 一．重点词组

eat gra eat leaves be quiet very shy very smart very cute play with her friends kind of South Africa other animals at night in the day every day during the day 二.交际用语

1.Why do you like pandas? Because they’re very clever.

2.Why does he like koalas? Because they’re kind of interesting.3.Where are lions from? They are from South Africa.4.What other animals do you like? I like dogs, too.Why? Because they’re friendly and clever.

5.Molly likes to play with her friends and eat gra.6.She’s very shy.7.He is from Australia.8．He sleeps during the day, but at night he gets up and eats leaves.9．He usually sleeps and relaxes 20 hours every day.10．Let’s see the pandas first.11．They’re kind of interesting.

12．What other animals do you like? 13．Why do you want to see the lions?

三.重点难点释义

1、kind of 有点，稍微

Koala bears are kind of shy.考拉有点害羞。 kind 还有“种类”的意思

如：各种各样的 all kinds of We have all kinds of beautiful flowers in our school.

2、China n.中国 Africa n.非洲

China 和Africa都是专有名词，首字母都应该大写，而且和介词in连用。 There are many kinds of tigers in China.There are many kinds of scary animals in Africa.

3、friendly adj.友好的，和蔼可亲的

它是名词friend的形容词形式，常常和be动词连用, be friendly。 The people in Chengdu are very friendly.

4、with prep.跟，同，和…在一起 I usually play che with my father.注意区别与and的用法，and通常用于连接主语或宾语，连接主语时， 如果有I, I通常放在 and 之后，如：

My father and I usually play che together.Play with “和…一起玩耍”“玩…” I often play with my pet dog.Don’t play with water!

5、day和night 是一对反义词，day 表示白天或一天，night表示夜或夜晚。 通常说in the day, during the day, at night。

Koala bears often sleep during the day and eat leaves at night.

6、leaf n.叶子

复数形式为：leaves, 类似的变化还有：wife—wives, wolf—wolves, knife—knives等。

7、hour n.小时；点钟

hour前边通常加上冠词an 表示“一个小时”， 即：an hour。 There are 24 hours in a day and 60minutes in an hour.

8、be from 来自… be from = come from Pandas are from China.= Pandas come form China.

9、meat n.（食用的）肉，为不可数名词，表示“许多”时，使用much来修 饰，即：much meat He eats much meat every day.

10、gra n.草，为不可数名词，表示“许多”时，使用much来修饰，即：much gra。

There is much gra on the playground.四.语法知识

特殊疑问句通常以“what”、“who”、“which”、“when”、“where”、“how”、“how old”、“how many”等开头，对某一具体问题进行提问。 特殊疑问句的基本构成有两种情况：

1.疑问句+一般疑问句结构。这是最常见的情况。例如：

What’s your grandfather’s telephone number? 你爷爷的电话号码是多少？ Who is that boy with big eyes? 那个大眼睛的男孩是谁？ Which season do you like best? 你最喜欢哪个季节？ When is he going to play the piano? 他什么时候弹钢琴？ Where does he live? 他住在哪儿？ How are you? 你好吗？

How old are you? 你多大了？

How many brothers and sisters do you have? 你有几个兄弟姐妹？ 2.疑问句+陈述句结构。这时疑问词作主语或修饰主语。例如： Who is on duty today? 今天谁值日？

Which man is your teacher? 哪位男士是你的老师？

我们学过的What/How about+名词/代词+其他？也是特殊疑问句，它是一种省略结构。 例如：

I like English.What/How about you? 我喜欢英语。你呢？ What about playing basketball? 打篮球怎么样？

Unit 4 I want to be an actor.一．短语：

1 want to do sth 想要作某事

2 give sb sth = give sth to sb 给某人某物 / 把某物给某人

3 help sb do sth 帮助某人作某事 Eg: I want to help my mother do some housework at home.4 help sb with sth 帮助某人谋事 Eg: I want to help my mother with some housework at home 5 in the day 在白天 6 at night 在晚上

7 talk with/ to sb 和----谈话

8 be busy doing sth 忙于做某事 Eg: He is busy listening to the teacher.9 in a hospital 在医院l 10 work/ study hard 努力工作 11 Evening Newspaper 晚报 二．重点句式及注意事项：

1 询问职业的特殊疑问词是what；有三种主要句式 ① What + is / are + sb? ② What + does/ do + sb + do? ③ What + is/ are + 名词所有格/ 形容词性物主代词 + job? 2 People give me their money or get their money from me.3 Sometimes I work in the day and sometimes at night.4 I like talking to people.5 I work late.I’m very busy when people go out to dinners.6 Where does your sister work?

7 then we have a job for you as a waiter.8 Do you want to work for a magazine? Then come and work for us as a reporter.9 Do you like to work evenings and weekends? 10 We are an international school for children of 5-12.三． 本单元中的名词复数。

1 policeman--- policemen 2 woman doctor----- women doctors 3 thief-----thieves

第19篇：中学英语语法

中学英语语法网络图全集 中学英语语法网络图 一．名词

I.名词的种类： 专有名词 普通名词

国名.地名.人名，

团体.机构名称 可数名词 不可数名词

个体名词 集体名词 抽象名词 物质名词 II.名词的数：

1.规则名词的复数形式：

名词的复数形式，一般在单数形式后面加-s或-es。现将构成方法与读音规则列表如下： 规则 例词

1 一般情况在词尾加-s map-maps, sea-seas, girl-girls, day-days

2 以s, x, ch, sh结尾的名词后加-es cla-claes, box-boxes, watch-watches, dish-dishes

3 以-f或-fe结尾的词 变-f和-fe为v再加-es leaf-leaves, thief-thieves, knife-knives, loaf-loaves, wife-wives

加-s belief-beliefs, chief-chiefs, proof-proofs, roof-roofs, gulf-gulfs

4 以辅音字母加y结尾的名词，变y为i加-es party-parties, family-families, story-stories, city-cities

5 以元音字母加y结尾的名词，或专有名词以y结尾的，加-s toy-toys, boy-boys, day-days, ray-rays, Henry-Henrys

6 以辅音字母加-o结尾的名词 一般加-es hero-heroes, Negro-Negroes, potato-potatoes, tomato-tomatoes

不少外来词加-s piano-pianos, photo-photos, auto-autos, kilo-kilos, solo-solos 两者皆可 zero-zeros/zeroes, volcano-volcanoes/ volcanos

7 以元音字母加-o结尾的名词加-s radio-radios, bamboo-bamboos, zoo-zoos 8 以-th结尾的名词加-s truth-truths, mouth-mouths, month-months, path-paths, 2.不规则名词复数：

英语里有些名词的复数形式是不规则的，现归纳如下： 规则 例词

1 改变名词中的元音字母或其他形式 man-men, woman-women, foot-feet, goose-geese, mouse-mice

2 单复数相同 sheep, deer, series, means, works, fish, species li, yuan, jin, 3 只有复数形式 ashes, trousers, clothes, thanks, goods, glaes, compaes, contents

4 一些集体名词总是用作复数 people, police, cattle, staff

5 部分集体名词既可以作单数（整体）也可以作复数（成员） audience, cla, family, crowd, couple, group, committee, government, population, crew, team, public, enemy, party 6 复数形式表示特别含义 customs(海关), forces(军队), times(时代), spirits(情绪), drinks(饮料), sands(沙滩), papers(文件报纸), manners(礼貌), looks(外表), brains(头脑智力), greens(青菜), ruins(废墟)

7 表示“某国人” 加-s Americans, Australians, Germans, Greeks, Swedes, Europeans

单复数同形 Swi, Portuguese, Chinese, Japanese

以-man或-woman结尾的改为-men,-women Englishmen, Frenchwomen 8 合成名词 将主体名词变为复数 sons-in-law, lookers-on, paers-by, story-tellers, boy friends

无主体名词时将最后一部分变为复数 grown-ups, housewives, stopwatches 将两部分变为复数 women singers, men servants III.名词的所有格：

名词在句中表示所有关系的语法形式叫做名词所有格。所有格分两种：一是名词词尾加’s构成，二是由介词of加名词构成。前者多表示有生命的东西，后者多表示无生命的东西。 1.’s所有格的构成：

单数名词在末尾加’s the boy’s father, Jack’s book, her son-in-law’s photo, 复数名词 一般在末尾加’ the teachers’ room, the twins’ mother, 不规则复数名词后加’s the children’s toys, women’s rights,

以s结尾的人名所有格加’s或者’ Dickens’ novels, Charles’s job, the Smiths’ house

表示各自的所有关系时,各名词末尾均须加’s Japan’s and America’s problems, Jane’s and Mary’s bikes

表示共有的所有关系时在最后一词末加’s Japan and America’s problems, Jane and Mary’s father

表示”某人家””店铺”，所有格后名词省略 the doctor’s, the barber’s, the tailor’s, my uncle’s

2.’s所有格的用法：

1 表示时间 today’s newspaper, five weeks’ holiday

2 表示自然现象 the earth’s atmosphere, the tree’s branches

3 表示国家城市等地方的名词 the country’s plan, the world’s population, China’s industry

4 表示工作群体 the ship’s crew, majority’s view, the team’s victory 5 表示度量衡及价值 a mile’s journey, five dollars’ worth of apples 6 与人类活动有特殊关系的名词 the life’s time, the play’s plot

7 某些固定词组 a bird’s eye view, a stone’s throw, at one’s wit’s end(不知所措) 3.of所有格的用法：

用于无生命的东西：the legs of the chair, the cover of the book 用于有生命的东西，尤其是有较长定语时：the clarooms of the first-year students 用于名词化的词：the struggle of the oppreed

二．冠词

冠词分为不定冠词（a, an），定冠词（the），和零冠词。 I.不定冠词的用法：

1 指一类人或事，相当于a kind of A plane is a machine that can fly. 2 第一次提及某人某物，非特指 A boy is waiting for you. 3 表示“每一”相当于every，one We study eight hours a day. 4 表示“相同”相当于the same We are nearly of an age.

5 用于人名前，表示不认识此人或与某名人有类似性质的人或事 A Mr.Smith came to visit you when you were out That boy is rather a Lei Feng.

6 用于固定词组中 A couple of, a bit, once upon a time, in a hurry, have a walk, many a time

7 用于quite, rather, many, half, what, such之后 This room is rather a big one. 8 用于so(as, too, how)+形容词之后 She is as clever a girl as you can wish to meet.II.定冠词的用法：

1 表示某一类人或物 The horse is a useful animal.

2 用于世上独一无二的事物名词前 the universe, the moon, the Pacific Ocean 3 表示说话双方都了解的或上文提到过的人或事 Would you mind opening the door?

4 用于乐器前面 play the violin, play the guitar

5 用于形容词和分词前表示一类人 the reach, the living, the wounded 6 表示“一家人”或“夫妇” the Greens, the Wangs

7 用于序数词和形容词副词比较级最高级前 He is the taller of the two children. 8 用于国家党派等以及江河湖海，山川群岛的名词前 the United States, the Communist Party of China, the French

9 用于表示发明物的单数名词前 The compa was invented in China. 10 在逢十的复数数词之前，指世纪的某个年代 in the 1990’s 11 用于表示单位的名词前 I hired the car by the hour.

12 用于方位名词，身体部位名词，及表示时间的词组前 He patted me on the shoulder.III.零冠词的用法：

1 专有名词，物质名词，抽象名词，人名地名等名词前 Beijing University, Jack, China, love, air

2 名词前有this, my, whose, some, no, each, every等限制 I want this book, not that one./ Whose purse is this? 3 季节，月份，星期，节假日，一日三餐前 March, Sunday, National Day, spring 4 表示职位，身份，头衔的名词前 Lincoln was made President of America. 5 学科，语言，球类，棋类名词前 He likes playing football/che. 6 与by连用表示交通工具的名词前 by train, by air, by land 7 以and连接的两个相对的名词并用时 husband and wife, knife and fork, day and night

8 表示泛指的复数名词前 Horses are useful animals.

三．代词：

I.代词可以分为以下七大类：

1 人称代词 主格 I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they 宾格 me, you, him, her, it, us, you, them

2 物主代词 形容词性 my, your, his, her, its, our, their 名词性 mine, yours, his, hers, its, ours, theirs

3 反身代词 myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, ourselves, yourselves, themselves

4 指示代词 this, that, these, those, such, some

5 疑问代词 who, whom, whose, which, what, whoever, whichever, whatever 6 关系代词 that, which, who, whom, whose, as

7 不定代词 one/ some/ any, each/ every, none/ no, many/ much, few/ little/ a few/ a little,

other/ another, all/ both, neither/ either II.不定代词用法注意点： 1.one, some与any: 1) one可以泛指任何人，也可特指，复数为ones。some多用于肯定句，any多用于疑问句和否定句。

One should learn to think of others.Have you any bookmarks? No, I don’t have any bookmarks.I have some questions to ask.

2) some可用于疑问句中，表示盼望得到肯定的答复，或者表示建议，请求等。

Would you like some bananas? Could you give me some money? 3) some 和any修饰可数名词单数时，some表示某个，any表示任何一个。 I have read this article in some magazine.Please correct the mistakes, if any.4) some和数词连用表示“大约”，any可与比较级连用表示程度。

There are some 3,000 students in this school.Do you feel any better today? 2.each和every: each强调个别，代表的数可以是两个或两个以上，而every强调整体，所指的数必须是三个或三个以上。

Each student has a pocket dictionary./ Each (of us) has a dictionary./ We each have a dictionary.Every student has strong and weak points./ Every one of us has strong and weak points.3.none和no：

no等于not any，作定语。none作主语或宾语，代替不可数名词，谓语用单数，代替可数名词，谓语单复数皆可以。 There is no water in the bottle.How much water is there in the bottle? None.None of the students are (is) afraid of difficulties.4.other和another: 1) other泛指“另外的，别的”常与其他词连用，如：the other day, every other week, some other reason, no other way,

the other特指两者中的另外一个，复数为the others。如： He held a book in one hand and his notes in the other.Two students in our cla failed, but all the others paed the exam.2) another指“又一个，另一个”无所指，复数形式是others，泛指“别的人或事”如：

I don’t like this shirt, please show me another (one).

The trousers are too long, please give me another pair / some others.Some like football, while others like basketball.5.all和both, neither和either all表示不可数名词时，其谓语动词用单数。both和all加否定词表示部分否定，全部否定用neither和none.All of the books are not written in English./ Not all of the books are written in English.Both of us are not teachers./ Not both of us are teachers./ Either of us is a teacher.

四．形容词和副词 I.形容词：

1.形容词的位置：

1) 形容词作定语通常前置，但在下列情况后置：

1 修饰some, any, every, no和body, thing, one等构成的复合不定代词时 nobody absent, everything poible

2 以-able, -ible结尾的形容词可置于有最高级或only修饰的名词之后 the best book available, the only solution poible

3 alive, alike, awake, aware, asleep等可以后置 the only person awake 4 和空间、时间、单位连用时 a bridge 50 meters long

5 成对的形容词可以后置 a huge room simple and beautiful 6 形容词短语一般后置 a man difficult to get on with 2) 多个形容词修饰同一个名词的顺序： 代词 数词 性状形容词

冠词前的形容词 冠词 指示代词 不定代词

代词所有格 序数词 基数词 性质 状态 大小 长短

形状 新旧

温度 颜色 国籍 产地 材料 质地 名词

all both such the a this another your second next one four beautiful good poor large short square new cool black yellow Chinese London silk stone 3) 复合形容词的构成：

1 形容词+名词+ed kind-hearted 6 名词+形容词 world-famous 2 形容词+形容词 dark-blue 7 名词+现在分词 peace-loving

3 形容词+现在分词 ordinary-looking 8 名词+过去分词 snow-covered 4 副词+现在分词 hard-working 9 数词+名词+ed three-egged 5 副词+过去分词 newly-built 10 数词+名词 twenty-year II.副词

副词的分类：

1 时间副词 soon, now, early, finally, once, recently 5 频度副词 always, often, frequently, seldom, never

2 地点副词 here, nearby, outside, upwards, above 6 疑问副词 how, where, when, why

3 方式副词 hard, well, fast, slowly, excitedly, really 7 连接副词 how, when, where, why, whether, however, meanwhile

4 程度副词 almost, nearly, very, fairly, quite, rather 8 关系副词 when, where, why III.形容词和副词比较等级：

形容词和副词的比较等级分为原级，比较级和最高级。比较级和最高级的构成一般是在形容词和副词后加-er和-est，多音节和一些双音节词前加more 和most。 1.同级比较时常常用 as…as…以及not so(as)…as…如：I am not so good a player as you are.2.可以修饰比较级的词有：much, many, a lot, even, far, a bit, a little, still, yet, by far, any, a great deal。

3.表示一方随另一方变化时用“the more…the more…”句型。如：The harder you work, the more progre you will make.4.用比较级来表达最高级的意思。如：I have never spent a more worrying day.5.表示倍数的比较级有如下几种句型：

Our school is three times larger than yours./Our school is four times as large as yours./Our school is four times the size of yours.

6.表示“最高程度“的形容词没有最高级和比较级。如：favourite, excellent, extreme, perfect。

五．介词

I.介词分类：

1 简单介词 about, acro, after, against, among, around, at, below, beyond, during, in, on

2 合成介词 inside, into, onto, out of, outside, throughout, upon, within, without 3 短语介词 according to, because of, instead of, up to, due to, owing to, thanks to

4 双重介词 from among, from behind, from under, till after, in between 5 分词转化成的介词 considering(就而论), including 6 形容词转化成的介词 like, unlike, near, next, opposite II.常用介词区别：

1 表示时间的in, on, at at表示片刻的时间，in表示一段的时间，on总是与日子有关

2 表示时间的since, from since 指从过去到现在的一段时间，和完成时连用，from指从时间的某一点开始

3 表示时间的in, after in指在一段时间之后，after表示某一具体时间点之后或用在过去时的一段时间中

4 表示地理位置的in, on, to in表示在某范围内，on指与什么毗邻，to指在某环境范围之外

5 表示“在…上”的on, in on只表示在某物的表面上，in表示占去某物一部分

6 表示“穿过”的through, acro through表示从内部通过，与in有关，acro表示在表面上通过，与on有关

7 表示“关于”的about, on about指涉及到，on指专门论述

8 between与among的区别 between表示在两者之间，among用于三者或三者以上的中间

9 besides与except的区别 besides指“除了…还有再加上”，except指“除了，减去什么”，不放在句首 10 表示“用”的in, with with表示具体的工具，in表示材料，方式，方法，度量，单位，语言，声音

11 as与like的区别 as意为“作为，以…地位或身份”，like为“象…一样”，指情形相似

12 in与into区别 in通常表示位置（静态），into表示动向，不表示目的地或位置

第20篇：英语语法—词性

基本词性

1.名词（nouns）n.：

名词是词性的一种，也是实词的一种，是指代人、物、事、时、地、情感、概念等实体或抽象事物的词。名词可以独立成句。在短语或句子中通常可以用代词来替代；名词可以分为专有名词（Proper Nouns）和普通名词(Common Nouns）；专有名词是某个（些）人，地方，机构等专有的名称，如Beijing，China等，专有名词的首字母要大写。普通名词是一类人或东西或是一个抽象概念的名词，如：book，sadne。 2.代词(pronoun) pron.: 代词是代替名词的一种词类。大多数代词具有名词和形容词的功能。英语中的代词有：人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互代词、疑问代词、关系代词、连接代词和不定代词九种。

3.数词（numeral）Num.： 数词是表示数量或顺序的词，数词分为基数词和序数词和分数词三种。基数词就是表示数量多少的词，序数词就是表示第几的词。 4.形容词（adjective）adj/a.：

形容词是很多语言中均有的主要词类中的一种。形容词用来修饰名词或代词，表示人或事物的性质，状态，和特征。 5.副词（adverb) 副词是一种用来修饰动词、形容词，说明时间、地点、程度、方式等概念的词。副词是一种半虚半实的词。副词可分为：时间副词、地点副词、方式副词、程度副词、疑问副词、连接副词、关系副词、频率副词和说明性副词。 6.动词（Verb）v.：

动词是用来表示各类动作的词汇。基本上每个完整的句子都有一个动词，要表示第二个动作时可使用不定词、动名词、对等连接词、不及物动词、及物动词从属连接词或增加句子等方法。

7.冠词（article) art.：

冠词是虚词，本身不能单独使用，也没有词义。它一般用在名词的前面，修饰名词，表示特指的某种物质。有时它也用于形容词前面，例如the old，the poor，指怎么样的一类人。 冠词不能离开名词独立存在，它表示的主语数量或者特征。但是在专有名词前面不能用冠词。 8.介词（preposition）prep.：

介词是一种用来表示词与词、词与句之间的关系的虚词，在句中不能单独作句子成分。介词后面一般有名词、代词，或相当于名词的其他词类，短语或从句作它的宾语。介词和它的宾语构成介词词组，在句中作状语，表语，补语或介词宾语。

介词可以分为时间介词、地点介词、方式介词、原因介词和其他介词。 介词有at,in,before,after,on,by,with等。 9.连词（conjunction）conj.：

连词是一种虚词， 它不能独立担任句子成分，只起连接词与词、短语与短语以及句与句的作用。连词主要可分为4类：并列连词、转折连词、选择连词和因果连词。 10.助词：(auxiliary) aux.: 助词是附着在词，短语，句子的前面或后面，表示结构关系或某些附加意义的虚词。助词有结构助词，时态助词，语气助词三种。 11.叹词：（interjection）interj.： 叹词是语法学术语。表示感叹、呼唤、应答的词。 判断词

判断词表示判断“是”或“否”的词语，常用no，yes，not。 一般条件状语从句的连词都有是否的意思，例如if、whether。 情态动词

情态动词本身有一定的词义，但要与动词原形及其被动语态一起使用，给谓语动词增添情态色彩，表示说话人对有关行为或事物的态度和看法，认为其可能、应该或必要等。情态动词后面加动词原形。

1)情态动词不能表示正在发生或已经发生的事情，只表示期待或估计某事的发生。 2)情态动词除ought 和have 外，后面只能接不带to 的不定式。

3)情态动词不随人称的变化而变化，即情态动词第三人称单数不加-s。 4)情态动词没有非谓语形式，即没有不定式、分词等形式。 感叹词

感叹词是用来表示说话时表达的喜、怒、哀、乐等情感的词。它不构成后面句子的一个语法成分，却在意义上与它有关联，后面的句子一般说明这种情绪的性质、原因。感叹词是英语口语中最富有表现力的词语之一，用途甚广。下面是感叹词的用法： Oh 表示惊讶、指责、痛苦、称赞、懊恼等，可译为“哦”、“哎呀”、“噢”“啊”、“呀”等。例如：

（1）.\"Oh, who was that?\" Mr.Black asked.“哦，是谁？”布莱克先生问。 （2）.\"Oh, how blind you are!\" he cried.“哎呀，你们真瞎！”他大声道。 其他

1、动名词：动名词是一种兼有动词和名词特征的非限定动词。它可以支配宾语，也能被副词修饰。动名词有时态和语态的变化。

2、动词不定式：由to+动词原形构成。不定式是一种非限定性动词。而非限定动词是指那些在句中不能单独充当谓语的动词，可分为不定式、动名词、现在分词和过去分词。

3、分词[participle]：具有动词及形容词二者特征的词；尤指以ing、ed、d、t、en或n结尾的英语动词性形容词，具有形容词功能，同时又表现各种动词性特点，如时态，语态、带状语性修饰语的性能及带宾词的性能。

《英语语法口诀.doc》

将本文的Word文档下载到电脑，方便编辑。

推荐度：

点击下载文档